JVC DVD VCR Combo 1204MNH SW VE User Manual

DVD / HDD VIDEO RECORDER &  
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER  
DR-MX1S  
CABLE/SAT  
17  
TV  
DVD  
STANDBY/ON  
TV/CBL/SA  
DVD  
TV  
TV AV  
T
VIDEO  
VHS  
HDD  
DVD  
TV  
PR  
CANCEL  
LIVE  
AUX  
MEMO/MARK  
DUBBING  
EDIT PROGRAMME  
NAVIGATION  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
ENTER  
RETURN  
PREVIOUS  
SLOW  
NEXT  
SLOW  
PLAY/SELECT  
CLEAR  
REC  
STOP/  
PAUSE  
JUMP  
REC MODE  
REMAIN  
DISPLAY  
ON SCREEN  
SET UP  
RAM/RW  
INSTRUCTIONS  
EN  
LPT0976-001B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY FIRST  
EN  
3
MOISTURE CONDENSATION  
For Italy:  
Moisture in the air will condense on the unit when you move it from  
a cold place to a warm place, or under extremely humid  
conditions^just as water droplets form on the surface of a glass  
filled with cold liquid. In conditions where condensation may occur,  
disconnect the unit’s power plug from the wall and keep it  
disconnected for a few hours to let the moisture dry, then turn on  
the unit.  
AIt is declared that this product, brand JVC, conforms to the  
Ministry Decree n. 548 of 28 Aug.95 published in the Official  
Gazette of the Italian Republic n. 301 of 28 Dec.95B  
The STANDBY/ON A button does not completely shut off  
mains power from the unit, but switches operating current on  
and off. ABB shows electrical power standby and ACB shows ON.  
ATTENTION:  
To mobile phone users:  
When the equipment is installed in a cabinet or a shelf, make sure  
that it has sufficient space on all sides to allow for ventilation  
(10 cm or more on both sides, on top and at the rear).  
Using a mobile phone in the vicinity of the unit may cause picture  
vibration on the TV screen or change the screen to a blue back  
display.  
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and the local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
On placing the unit:  
Some TVs or other appliances generate strong magnetic fields.  
Do not place such appliances on top of the unit as it may cause  
picture disturbance.  
Failure to heed the following precautions may result in  
damage to the unit, remote control or disc.  
1. DO NOT place the unit ^  
When moving the product:  
Press A to turn off the power, and wait at least 30 seconds  
before unplugging the power cord. Then, wait at least 2 minutes  
before moving the product.  
^ in an environment prone to extreme temperatures or  
humidity.  
^ in direct sunlight.  
^ in a dusty environment.  
^ in an environment where strong magnetic fields are  
generated.  
HOW TO USE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
All major sections and subsections are listed in the Table Of  
Contents on page 4. Use this when searching for information on  
a specific procedure or feature.  
The Index on pages 10 – 13 illustrates the controls and  
connections on the front and rear panel, the front display panel  
and the remote control.  
The list of terms on page 99 lists frequently-used terms, and the  
number of the page on which they are used or explained in the  
manual.  
The A mark signals a reference to another page for instructions  
or related information.  
^ on a surface that is unstable or subject to vibration.  
2. DO NOT block the unit’s ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a  
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
3. DO NOT place heavy objects on the unit or remote control.  
4. DO NOT place anything which might spill on top of the unit  
or remote control.  
(If water or liquid is allowed to enter this equipment, fire or  
electric shock may be caused.)  
5. DO NOT expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing.  
6. DO NOT use this equipment in a bathroom or places with  
water. Also DO NOT place any containers filled with water or  
liquids (such as cosmetics or medicines, flower vases, potted  
plants, cups, etc.) on top of this unit.  
Operation buttons necessary for the various procedures are  
clearly indicated through the use of illustrations at the beginning  
of each major section.  
7. DO NOT place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
8. AVOID violent shocks to the unit during transport.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SAFETY FIRST  
4
EN  
Safety Precautions.........................................................................2  
About Discs....................................................................................5  
INDEX  
Auto Set Up..................................................................................17  
Language .....................................................................................20  
Dubbing ....................................................................................... 64  
Edit To Or From Another Recorder ............................................. 71  
SAT CONTROL SET  
Remote Control Functions........................................................... 74  
Basic Playback.............................................................................24  
SYSTEM CONNECTIONS  
(HDD & DVD Deck Only) .......................................................... 77  
76  
Basic Playback.............................................................................39  
Playback Features .......................................................................39  
c System Setup............................................................. 83  
Clock Set ..................................................................................... 86  
Finalise A Disc (DVD Deck Only) ................................................ 88  
Scan Mode Set............................................................................ 89  
Playback Features .......................................................................42  
Recording Features......................................................................44  
SPECIFICATIONS  
APPENDIX  
94  
95  
99  
TIMER RECORDING ON HDD/DVD DECK  
49  
c Timer Programming ....................................................49  
Manual Timer Programming.........................................................51  
Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
LIST OF TERMS  
(HDD Deck Only).......................................................................53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DISC INFORMATION  
EN  
5
DVD-R/RW Discs  
It is only possible to use DVD-R discs which conform with DVD-R  
standard Version 2.0.  
About Discs  
Although this unit supports 8x speed DVD-R and 4x speed  
DVD-RW discs, dubbing cannot be achieved at 8x speed and 4x  
speed respectively.  
When a DVD-R/RW disc (Video mode) is finalised (A pg. 88), it  
can be played back on a standard DVD player as a DVD VIDEO  
disc.  
Recordable/Playable Discs  
You can use discs with the following logos for recording and  
playback.  
When a DVD-RW disc (VR mode) is finalised (A pg. 88), it can be  
played back on a standard DVD player compatible with the VR  
mode of DVD-RW discs.  
Before finalising ^  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-RW  
^ it is possible to record on unrecorded areas of the disc, edit the  
disc title and programme titles, and delete programmes.  
It is impossible to record or edit DVD-R/RW discs recorded on  
other devices even if they have not been finalised.  
It is impossible to overwrite recorded areas of DVD-R discs.  
Available recording capacity does not increase even if a recorded  
programme is deleted from a DVD-R disc.  
12 cm: 4.7 GB/9.4 GB  
8 cm: 1.4 GB/2.8 GB  
Ver. 2.0/2x speed  
Ver. 2.1/1x – 3x speed  
12 cm: 4.7 GB/9.4 GB  
Ver. 1.1/1x – 2x speed  
(Video mode/VR mode)  
Ver. 1.2/4x speed  
(Video mode/VR mode)  
After finalising ^  
After a DVD-R/RW disc (Video mode) has been finalised, it is  
possible to play back the recorded programmes (video and/or  
audio) on a standard DVD video player as a DVD VIDEO disc.  
Edited titles are displayed as the  
DVD-R  
12 cm: 4.7 GB  
8 cm: 1.4 GB  
CONTENTS MENU  
PREV  
ADVD menuB in video mode.  
81 Sister Princess ED2 14/11 0:55 PR12<HDD MN26  
82 GALAXY ANGLE A#04 OP 06/10 9:30 PR12<HDD  
83 GALAXY ANGLE A#04 ED 06/10 9:30 PR12<HDD  
84 FISHING WORLD OP 22/12 20:00 PR3  
85 FISHING WORLD ED 22/12 20:00 PR3  
86 RALLY CAR OP 10/04 0:30 PR3  
16.11.2002  
07.10.2002  
07.10.2002  
22.12.2002  
22.12.2002  
04.10.2002  
04.10.2002  
02.05.2002  
02.05.2002  
26.09.2002  
It is impossible to record, edit or  
delete the data either in video  
mode or in VR mode.  
Either in video mode or in VR  
mode, although the disc can be  
played back on DVD players from  
other manufacturers, sometimes it  
Ver. 2.0/1x – 4x/8x speed  
(Video mode)  
87 RALLY CAR ED 10/04 0:30 PR3  
The above table is based on the information as of October 2004.  
Recording and playback may not be performed depending on the  
characteristics and condition of the disc used, leading to  
unsatisfactory results. Using discs manufactured by JVC is  
recommended since they have been tested to be compatible with  
this unit.  
88 Chobits #04 OP 02/05 PR10  
89 Chobits #04 ED 02/05 PR10  
90 Chobits #25 ED 26/09 PR10 MN32 LPCM  
NEXT  
may not be possible to play back depending on the disc and  
recording conditions.  
It is impossible to record on CD-R/RW or DVD-R discs used for  
authoring.  
It is impossible to record onto DVD-R/RW (Video mode) discs  
broadcasts that allow you to copy once. The copy once  
programmes can only be recorded onto DVD-RW discs formatted  
in VR mode.  
DVD-RAM Discs  
It is only possible to use discs which conform with DVD-RAM  
standard Version 2.0 or 2.1.  
It is impossible to record on DVD-RAM discs which do not  
conform to this standard. If you use a disc formatted under a  
different standard version, format it on this unit before use.  
It may not be possible to record, play back, edit or dub a  
DVD-RAM disc even if it conforms to the standard if it was  
recorded or edited on the devices from other manufacturers or on  
a PC, or if it has far too many titles, or if there is very little  
available capacity remaining on the disc.  
NOTE:  
The following may result if you play back a DVD-R disc recorded  
on another unit.  
The disc does not play.  
A mosaic pattern (block noise) appears on the screen.  
Video or audio may be dropped out.  
The unit stops during playback.  
DVD-RAM discs recorded on this unit cannot be played back on  
an incompatible DVD player.  
It is possible to record copy-once programmes of digital  
broadcasts only onto 4.7/9.4 GB DVD-RAM discs (2.8 GB  
DVD-RAM discs are not compatible).  
Although this unit supports 3x speed DVD-RAM discs, dubbing  
cannot be achieved at 3x speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DISC INFORMATION  
6
EN  
Discs For Playback Only  
Unplayable Discs  
You can use discs with the following logos for playback only.  
The following types of discs cannot be played using this unit.  
Do not attempt to play back any kind of disc that is damaged  
(cracked, warped, or repaired with adhesive tape) or discs in  
unusual shapes (heart-shaped, octagonal, or other forms). If such  
discs are accidentally played back, it may cause noise that can  
lead to speaker damage.  
DVD VIDEO  
Video CD/Super Video CD  
(example of region code  
indications)  
CD-ROM discs (including PHOTO-CD and CD-G)  
Discs recorded in Packet Write (UDF) format  
1.3-GB double density CDs (DDCD)  
High density CDs (HDCD)  
The following discs also cannot be played back.  
Discs of a region number other than A2B  
DVD-RAM (2.6 GB/5.2 GB)  
DVD-RAM (TYPE1)  
Audio CD  
CD-DA files  
CD-R  
CD-DA/JPEG/  
MP3 files  
Region Number  
The world is divided into 6 regions for DVD VIDEO discs.  
DVD VIDEO discs are assigned a region number to indicate which  
region they may be played back in. A disc cannot be played back  
on this unit unless the region number of the disc matches that of  
the unit. The region number for this unit is A2B. Only discs whose  
region number includes A2B or AALLB can be played back such as  
shown below.  
CD-ROM  
CD-RW  
CD-DA/JPEG/  
MP3 files  
JPEG/MP3 files  
Playback may not be performed depending on the characteristics  
and condition of the disc used.  
DTS Audio CDs can also be played back (An optional DTS  
decoder is required).  
Examples of DVD VIDEO labels which can be played back  
using this unit.  
MP3 and JPEG discs can be played back on this unit only when  
they have been recorded in the ISO9660 or Joliet format and  
finalised.  
JPEG files that can be played back on this unit must conform to  
JFIF/Baseline process, and the maximum resolution of a JPEG  
file is 2,812 x 2,112 pixels.  
Marks of discs in this instruction manual  
CD-R/RW discs recorded in music CD format need to be finalised  
to play back on this unit.  
Operation and audio quality of this unit are not guaranteed for  
discs that do not conform to the Compact Disc specification  
(CD-DA).  
Before you play back a CD, check for the CD logo and read the  
notes on the package to confirm that it conforms to the Compact  
Disc specification.  
Depending on the intentions of the author of the software,  
recording conditions of DVD discs and Video CD/SVCD discs  
may be restricted. Since this unit plays back discs according to  
the intentions of the author of the software as indicated on the  
disc, some functions may not operate as commanded.  
When switching from the first layer to the second layer of double-  
layered DVD VIDEO discs, the image and sound may be  
momentarily distorted. This is not a malfunction.  
DVD-AUDIO discs compatible with DVD video players can be  
played.  
Allows operation with a  
DVD-RAM disc.  
Allows operation with a  
Video CD/Super Video  
CD (SVCD) disc.  
Allows operation with a  
DVD-R disc.  
Allows operation with  
an Audio CD disc.  
Allows operation with a  
DVD-RW disc.  
Allows operation with a  
disc including MP3  
files.  
Allows operation with a  
DVD VIDEO disc.  
Allows operation with a  
disc including JPEG  
files.  
Super Audio CDs (SACD) compatible with conventional CD  
players can be played.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DISC INFORMATION  
EN  
7
Audio CD/Video CD/SVCD  
Typically, Audio CD discs are divided into separate tracks each  
containing one song. Each track is assigned a number. For  
example, the third track is Track 3. The same is true for Video CD/  
SVCD discs.  
However, some discs are not divided into tracks.  
Recording Medium And Format  
DVD-RAM  
Recording and erasing can be performed as many times as  
possible on a disc.  
Editing can be performed after recording, such as deleting  
unwanted parts.  
While recording, it is possible not only to start playback of a  
programme currently being recorded, but also to watch another  
programme previously recorded.  
Audio CD or Video CD/SVCD  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
DVD-RW (VR mode)  
Recording and erasing can be performed as many times as  
possible on a disc.  
Editing can be performed after recording, such as deleting  
unwanted parts.  
JPEG/MP3 Disc (CD-R/RW/ROM)  
MP3/JPEG files put in directories nested in several levels on a disc  
will be organized as if they were put in single level directories  
(groups) by the MP3/JPEG Navigation of this unit. (A pg. 63)  
File structure of a disc before starting the MP3/JPEG  
Navigation  
DVD-RW (Video mode)  
Can be played back on other DVD players.  
New recording can be performed by erasing all the data on a disc  
once played back.  
DVD-R  
Can be played back on other DVD players.  
Suitable when keeping a recorded disc for a long time.  
File Structure Of Discs  
Directory  
MP3 file  
JPEG file  
DVD VIDEO  
Typically, DVD VIDEO discs are made up of larger units called  
AtitlesB. Each title has a number (title number) that can be used to  
select desired titles. Titles are further divided into units called  
AchaptersB. Each chapter has a number (chapter number) that can  
also be used to select desired chapters. Note that some discs are  
not divided into titles and chapters.  
File structure of the disc after starting the MP3/JPEG  
Navigation  
Files are automatically grouped as follows and displayed on the  
MP3/JPEG Navigation screen. Data is displayed in the  
alphabetical order of file name. Files are grouped based on roots.  
When you record a programme on a DVD-RAM/RW (VR mode)  
disc  
A single recording session results in a single title (a single  
chapter). However, chapter marks are automatically inserted when  
recording is paused, or audio changes from monaural to stereo  
due to commercial breaks, etc. It is also possible to insert chapter  
marks at desired locations during playback. (A pg. 27)  
When you record a programme on a DVD-R/RW (Video mode)  
disc  
A single recording session results in a single title (a single  
chapter). However, chapter marks are automatically inserted when  
recording is paused, or audio changes due to commercial breaks,  
etc. It is also possible to insert chapter marks at desired locations  
during either recording or playback. Once the disc has been  
finalised, these chapter marks are deleted and new chapter marks  
are assigned automatically approximately every 5 minutes.  
DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD-R or DVD VIDEO disc  
This unit can recognise up to 9 hierarchies including directories  
and files.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Also, it can recognise up to 250 files in each group, and up to 99  
groups on a disc.  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2 Chapter 3  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3  
NOTES:  
In Video mode, even before finalising, it is impossible to perform  
editing operations other than changing the disc name and/or title  
names and deleting programmes and/or titles.  
Video CD/SVCD discs that support Playback Control (PBC)  
The contents of a disc are recorded into several hierarchies, and  
played back according to the instructions on the screen while  
navigating through the hierarchies. It is also possible to playback  
recorded tracks consecutively without activating the PBC function  
even when playing a PBC-compatible disc. (A pg. 28)  
Regarding the contents recorded on discs  
Some files may not be played back depending on the file types  
and other factors.  
After finalising, it is impossible to perform editing operations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DISC INFORMATION  
8
EN  
DVD VIDEO Marks  
Placing A Disc  
Sometimes marks are printed on a DVD disc and/or on its  
packaging to indicate information regarding the contents and  
functions of the disc. Check the marks indicating the contents and  
functions of the disc. Note, however, that in some cases a disc  
may not include a mark even for a function it supports.  
Opening the disc tray  
Press M to open the disc tray.  
Marks related to video  
Number of subtitles  
Number of angles  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
DVD  
DV IN  
DISPLAY VHS TIMER  
REC MODE  
Recorded under the  
standard 4:3 aspect  
ratio  
Screen includes  
black bands at the  
top and the bottom  
of image which has  
a standard 4:3  
aspect ratio (letter  
box)  
Pressing the button again closes the disc tray.  
Use the button to open and close the disc tray.  
Do not block the disc tray with your hand while it is opening or  
closing as this may result in hardware failure.  
Do not place unplayable discs or any object other than a disc on  
the disc tray.  
Video playback is in Wide video mode (16:9)  
on wide televisions, but in letter box on  
televisions with standard 4:3 aspect ratio.  
Do not press down strongly on the disc tray or place any heavy  
objects on it.  
Video playback is in Wide video mode (16:9)  
on wide televisions, but pan and scan is used  
on televisions with standard 4:3 aspect ratio  
(either the left or right side of the image is cut-  
out).  
Discs without cartridges  
Marks related to audio  
Number of audio tracks  
Disc tray  
Dolby Digital mark  
It has been developed by Dolby Laboratories as  
a digital surround system.  
Place the disc on the disc tray with the label side facing up. Since  
disc size changes depending on the disc to be played back, be  
sure to correctly align the disc with the grooves for its size. If the  
disc is not in its groove, it may be scratched or otherwise  
damaged. To insert an 8 cm disc, place it according to the inner  
groove.  
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)  
You can enjoy DTS audio if you connect an  
amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder to the  
DIGITAL OUT connector of the unit.  
DVD-RAM discs contained in cartridges  
Double-sided discs:  
Remove the disc from the cartridge. Align the disc with the grooves  
on the disc tray as shown in the illustration and insert with the side  
you wish to play back or record facing down. If you insert the disc  
with ASide AB facing down, programmes are recorded on the side  
A.  
Single-sided discs:  
Remove the disc from the cartridge. Align the disc with the grooves  
on the disc tray as shown in the illustration and insert with the label  
side facing up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DISC INFORMATION  
EN  
9
Care And Handling Of Discs  
How to handle discs  
When handling a disc, do not  
touch the surface of the disc.  
Since discs are made of  
plastic, they are easily  
damaged. If a disc gets dirty,  
dusty, scratched or warped, the  
images and sound will not be  
picked up correctly, and such a  
disc may cause the unit to malfunction.  
Label side  
Do not damage the label side, stick paper to or use any adhesives  
on its surface.  
Recording side  
Make sure that discs are not scratched and dirty on the recording  
side before use. Scratches and dirt on the recording side of a disc  
may hinder proper playback and recording. Also be careful that a  
DVD-RAM disc may get scratched or dirt when removed from  
cartridge then put back in after use.  
Storage  
Make sure that discs are kept in their cases. If discs are piled on  
top of one another without their protective cases, they can be  
damaged. Do not put discs in a location where they may be  
exposed to direct sunlight, or in a place where the humidity or  
temperature is high. Avoid leaving discs in your car!  
Maintenance of discs  
If there are fingerprints or other dirt adhering  
to a disc, wipe with a soft dry cloth, moving  
from the centre outwards.  
If a disc is difficult to clean, wipe with a cloth  
moistened with water. Never use record  
cleaners, petrol, alcohol or any anti-static  
agents.  
CAUTION:  
Sometimes during playback, noise may appear or images may  
be garbled. This is sometimes due to the disc. (It may not be up  
to industry standards.)  
These symptoms are caused by the discs, not by the  
malfunction of the unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INDEX  
EN  
10  
Front View  
D
A
B
C
E
F G H I J  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
STANDBY/ ON  
S-VIDEO  
VHS  
HDD  
DVD  
VIDEO (MONO)L–AUDIO–R  
DV IN  
PR  
DISPLAY  
VHS  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
F–1  
HDD/DVD  
K L  
M
O
P
R S T V W  
U
X
A Eject Button (M) (VHS) A pg. 41  
B Cassette Loading Slot  
VHS Recording Lamp (R) A pg. 44  
D HDD Lamp (HDD) A pg. 20, 37  
HDD Recording Lamp (R) A pg. 37  
K Standby/On Button (STANDBY/ON A)  
L S-video Input Connector [S-VIDEO] (HDD & DVD deck)  
A pg. 70  
M Video/Audio Input Connectors  
[VIDEO/AUDIO ((MONO) L/R)] A pg. 70  
N Programme Buttons (PR +/–) A pg. 34, 37, 43, 44  
O Front Display Panel A pg. 12  
E Open/Close Button (M) (DVD) A pg. 8  
F VHS/HDD/DVD Select Button (VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT)  
P DVD Lamp (DVD) A pg. 20, 24  
A pg. 24, 37, 41  
DVD Recording Lamp (R) A pg. 34  
Q Infrared Beam Receiving Window  
R Display Button (DISPLAY) A pg. 27, 35  
S VHS Timer Button (VHSj) A pg. 54  
T Recording Mode Button (REC MODE) A pg. 34, 37, 44  
U Play Button (I) A pg. 24, 39  
This button will not function during navigation mode or set up  
mode.  
G Stop Button (o) A pg. 24, 39  
H Disc Tray  
I Reverse Search Button (O) (HDD & DVD deck) A pg. 25,  
47  
V Record Button (R) A pg. 34, 37  
W Pause Button (W) A pg. 24, 39  
X DV Input connector [DV IN (A*)] (HDD & DVD deck only)  
A pg. 68  
Rewind Button (O) (VHS deck) A pg. 41, 42  
J Forward Search Button (N) (HDD & DVD deck) A pg. 25,  
47  
* A (i.Link) refers to the IEEE1394-1995 industry specification and  
extensions thereof. The A logo is used for products compliant with the  
i.Link standard.  
Fast Forward Button (N) (VHS deck) A pg. 41, 42  
To access covered connectors, pull  
and open the connector cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
EN  
11  
Rear View  
G
F
A
B
C
D
E
HDD/DVD/VHS  
HDD/DVD  
L-1  
AUDIO OUT  
IN/OUT  
Y
IN  
LEFT  
PB  
RIGHT  
P
R
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
ANTENNA  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
PCM/  
IN/DECODER  
L-2  
STREAM  
SAT CONTROL  
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
HDD/DVD  
K
H
I
A Region Number Label A pg. 6  
B AC Power Cord A pg. 16  
C Cooling Fan  
This prevents the temperature from rising inside the unit.  
Do not remove it.  
E Component Video Output Connectors [COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR)] A pg. 16  
This component video output enables you to watch the images  
on the VHS deck in Progressive scan mode, refer to AVHS  
Progressive ScanB (A pg. 43).  
Install the unit so as not to block the area around the fan.  
F L-1 Input/Output Connector [L-1 IN/OUT] A pg. 16, 71, 76,  
The unit may become hot when it is turned off, as the cooling  
fan on the rear of the unit is not activated. However, the cooling  
fan may be activated in the following cases;  
^ In the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording standby  
mode (A pg. 53), slightly before the starting time of VPS/  
PDC recording (A pg. 50).  
^ If you connect the decoder or satellite receiver to [L-2 IN/  
DECODER], and if AL-2 SELECTB is set to ADECODERB,  
ASAT VIDEOB or ASAT S-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
^ When AJUST CLOCKB is set to AONB (A pg. 86)  
(Set AJUST CLOCKB to AOFFB if you mind the noise of the  
fan.)  
77  
G Antenna Input Connector [ANTENNA IN] A pg. 16  
H Digital Audio Output Connectors  
[DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL)] (HDD & DVD  
deck only) A pg. 73, 77  
I Satellite Control Connector [SAT CONTROL] (HDD & DVD  
deck only) A pg. 22  
J L-2 Input/Decoder Connector [L-2 IN/DECODER] A pg. 22,  
71, 76, 77  
K Antenna Output Connector [ANTENNA OUT] A pg. 16  
D Audio Output Connectors [AUDIO OUT (LEFT/RIGHT)]  
A pg. 73, 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
EN  
12  
Front Display Panel  
L
M
A B  
C
D
E F G  
H
I
J
K
N
VPS/PDC  
LPCM  
FR  
XP SP LP EP  
VR + RW VCD  
-
-
VHS HDD DVD  
U
P
Q
R
V
S
T
O
A VIDEO Indicator (z) A pg. 35, 38, 44  
J Track/Chapter Indicator (TRK/CHAP)  
Lights when VIDEO mode is selected by pressing TV AV/  
VIDEO. Lights off when TV mode is selected.  
B Disc Type Indicator  
ATRKB or ACHAPB lights depending on a disc loaded while the  
3rd and 4th digits from the left of the Multi Display (S) indicate  
the numbers explained below.  
When a disc is loaded, the type of the disc is indicated.  
Disc Status Indicator  
When a disc is running, the disc marks rotate.  
During High-Speed Search:  
ATRKB: Total number of tracks or track number being played  
back are displayed on the Multi Display.  
ACHAPB: Chapter number being played back are displayed on  
the Multi Display.  
Rotate faster than normal playback.  
During Slow Motion:  
Rotate slower than normal playback.  
While recording:  
Inner red ring lights in the same way as normal playback.  
During Instant Timer Recording (ITR), inner red ring slowly  
blinks.  
K Simulated Surround Effect Indicator (3D) A pg. 31  
Lights when a simulated surround effect is set to A3D-ONB on  
the on-screen bar.  
L Random/Programme Playback Mode Indicator (RND/  
PRGM) A pg. 32  
ARNDB: Lights when Random Playback mode is set.  
APRGMB: Lights when Programme Playback mode is set.  
M Repeat Mode Indicator (x/1/A-B) A pg. 30  
Select Repeat Playback mode on the on-screen bar.  
While paused:  
Disc marks blink when either recording or playing back.  
While stopped:  
While resume stopped:  
While the disc tray opened: Disc marks all light out.  
No disc on the disc tray: Disc marks all light out.  
VR Mode Indicator (VR) A pg. 87  
Disc marks all blink.  
AxB:  
Ax1B:  
Whole disc is played back repeatedly.  
A single title/chapter/track is played back  
repeatedly.  
AxA-BB: The selected part (A-B) is played back repeatedly.  
No display: Repeat Playback mode is off.  
Lights when a DVD-RW disc is formatted in VR mode.  
C VPS/PDC Indicator A pg. 50  
Appears when checking if the station being received transmits a  
VPS/PDC signal.  
D Linear PCM Indicator (LPCM)  
N VPS/PDC Recording Indicator A pg. 50  
Lights when VPS/PDC recording function is activated.  
O VHS Indicator  
Lights when VHS mode has been selected, during recording or  
when tapes recorded in VHS format are played back.  
P Video Output Indicator (q) A pg. 43, 89  
No display: Indicates that interlace mode is engaged.  
Lights when AXP MODE REC AUDIOB is set to ALINEAR PCMB  
(A pg. 79) for recording with HDD, DVD-RAM, DVD-R and  
DVD-RW discs, and when Linear PCM audio is played.  
E Cassette Loaded Mark (u)  
Indicates the present of a cassette in the VHS deck.  
Lights when a cassette is loaded into the VHS deck. Blinks  
when the end of the tape has been reached during timer  
recording, or when the unit is in timer recording standby mode  
with a cassette without record safety tab inserted.  
F VHS Timer Indicator (j) A pg. 54  
Lights when the VHS deck is in the timer recording standby  
mode or when timer recording is in progress.  
G Recording Mode Indicator (XP/SP/LP/EP/FR) A pg. 34  
Blinks when recording mode is being set.  
q:  
Indicates that progressive mode is engaged.  
(Example) q lights when video output mode is in progressive  
mode.  
Q Automatic Satellite Programme Recording Indicator  
A pg. 53  
Lights when the HDD deck is in the Auto Satellite Programme  
Recording standby mode.  
R Group/Title Number Display  
S Track/Chapter Number Display  
T Remaining Time/Elapsed Time Indicator A pg. 27, 35  
Lights when remaining time of HDD, DVD-RAM, DVD-R and  
DVD-RW discs is displayed, and lights out when elapsed time  
is displayed.  
While AFRB is blinking, the left 3 digits of the Multi Display (R  
S) indicate setting values ranging from A60B to A480B. After the  
value has been set, only AFRB lights.  
The right 6 digits of the Multi Display (U) indicate elapsed or  
remaining time of each track.  
H Group/Title Indicator (GRP/TITLE)  
No display: Indicates elapsed time of the disc.  
Displayed: Indicates remaining time of the disc.  
U Remaining Time/Elapsed Time Display A pg. 27, 35  
V Multi Display  
AGRPB or ATITLEB lights depending on a disc loaded while the  
left 2 digits of the Multi Display (R) indicate the numbers  
explained below.  
AGRPB: Total number of groups or group number being played  
back are displayed on the Multi Display.  
ATITLEB: Total number of titles or title number being played  
back are displayed on the Multi Display.  
Displays clock, received channel, elapsed time, and remaining  
time.  
Also displays status of the unit (NO DISC/OPEN/CLOSE/  
READING).  
I Channel Indicator  
Indicates the channel received.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
EN  
Q Recording Mode Button (REC MODE) A pg. 34, 37  
Remain Button (REMAIN) A pg. 27, 35  
R Display Button (DISPLAY) A pg. 27, 35  
S VHS Timer Button (VHSj) A pg. 54  
T VPS/PDC Recording Button (VPS/PDCj) A pg. 50  
U Audio Button (AUDIO) A pg. 28  
Remote Control  
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
W
X
A
STANDBY/ON  
V Subtitle Button (SUBTITLE) A pg. 28  
W TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch A pg. 20  
X DVD STANDBY/ON Button (DVDA)  
Y TV/CBL/SAT STANDBY/ON Button (TV/CBL/SATA)  
A pg. 74  
DVD  
TV AV  
TV/CBL/SAT  
TV  
B
C
D
VIDEO  
Y
Z
VHS  
HDD  
DVD  
TV  
Z DVD Button* A pg. 24  
* This button will not function during navigation mode or set up mode.  
a TV Volume Buttons (TV8 +/–) A pg. 74  
b Programme Buttons (PR +/–) A pg. 34, 74  
c Memo Button (MEMO) A pg. 58, 61  
Mark Button (MARK) A pg. 27  
d Programming Button (PROGRAMME) A pg. 49, 51, 52  
e Edit Button (EDIT) A pg. 58  
f Navigation Button (NAVIGATION) A pg. 57  
g Enter Button (ENTER) A pg. 20  
h Return Button (RETURN) A pg. 28, 30, 49  
i Forward Skip Button (T) A pg. 25, 47  
Next Button (NEXT) A pg. 28  
a
E
PR  
b
c
CANCEL  
LIVE  
AUX  
MEMO/MARK  
F
G
DUBBING  
EDIT PROGRAMME  
NAVIGATION  
H
I
d
e
TOP MENU  
MENU  
f
J
K
j Forward Search Button (N) (HDD & DVD deck) A pg. 25,  
47  
ENTER  
Fast Forward Button (N) (VHS deck) A pg. 41  
Forward Slow Button (SLOW +) A pg. 26  
k Play Button (I) A pg. 24, 39  
g
h
i
RETURN  
L
Select Button (SELECT) A pg. 63  
PREVIOUS  
SLOW  
NEXT  
SLOW  
l Pause Button (W) A pg. 24, 39  
M
N
O
P
m Stop Button (o) A pg. 24, 39  
PLAY/SELECT  
j
Clear Button (CLEAR) A pg. 32  
n Skip Search Button (v) A pg. 26, 47  
o Set Up Button (SET UP) A pg. 20  
p One Touch Replay Button (w) A pg. 47  
q On-Screen Button (ON SCREEN) A pg. 14, 29  
r Automatic Satellite Programme Recording Button (SATj)  
A pg. 53  
k
l
m
CLEAR  
REC  
PAUSE  
STOP/  
JUMP  
n
o
p
REC MODE  
REMAIN  
DISPLAY  
ON SCREEN  
SET UP  
Q
R
s Progressive Scan Button (PROGRESSIVE SCAN) A pg. 43,  
89  
t Angle Button (ANGLE) (DVD deck only) A pg. 27  
Live Check Button (LIVE CHECK) A pg. 47  
q
VPS/PDC  
SUBTITLE  
VHS  
SAT  
S
T
U
r
How To Use  
PROGRESSIVE  
AUDIO  
Before use, insert two R6 size batteries into the remote control  
with the polarity (F and G) matched correctly as indicated on  
the battery compartment or on the lid.  
s
t
V
The remote control can operate most of your unit’s functions, as  
well as basic functions of TV sets and satellite receivers and  
other brands. (A pg. 74)  
Point the remote control toward the receiving window.  
The maximum operating distance of the remote control is  
about 8 m.  
A TV AV/VIDEO Button A pg. 35, 38, 44  
B TV Muting Button (TV d) A pg. 74  
C VHS Button* A pg. 41  
* This button will not function during navigation mode or set up mode.  
D HDD Button* A pg. 37  
NOTE:  
If the remote control doesn’t work properly, remove its batteries,  
wait a short time, replace the batteries and then try again.  
* This button will not function during navigation mode or set up mode.  
E Number Keys A pg. 34, 37  
F Cancel Button (CANCEL(L)) A pg. 32  
G Auxiliary Button (AUX) A pg. 51, 83  
H Live Button (LIVE) A pg. 47  
I Dubbing Button (DUBBING) A pg. 64  
J Top Menu Button (TOP MENU) A pg. 25  
K FGD E Buttons A pg. 17  
L Menu Button (MENU) A pg. 25  
M Reverse Skip Button (S) A pg. 25, 47, 40  
Previous Button (PREVIOUS) A pg. 28  
N Reverse Search Button (O) (HDD & DVD deck) A pg. 25,  
47  
Rewind Button (O) (VHS deck) A pg. 41  
Reverse Slow Button (SLOW –) A pg. 26  
O Record Button (R) A pg. 34, 37  
P Jump Button (JUMP +/–) A pg. 40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INDEX  
EN  
14  
When pressing REC MODE  
On-Screen Display (HDD & DVD deck)  
When ASUPERIMPOSEB is set to AAUTOB and ON SCREEN on the  
remote control is pressed, various operational indicators appear on  
the TV screen. To clear the operational indicators, press  
ON SCREEN twice.  
(Appears for eight seconds.)  
7: 00  
10: 00  
20: 00  
28: 00  
36: 00  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
FR480  
When playing back a recorded title  
HDD  
A Remaining disc time for each recording speed  
B Recording speed  
0:00  
1:00  
2:00 01:16:48  
FR360  
Digital  
When pressing R during recording  
FISHING WORLD  
ITR  
2 : 30  
A Title start  
B Current playback point  
C Title end  
A Recording time for Instant Timer Recording (ITR) mode  
D Elapsed playing time  
E Play mode  
F Name of title currently being played back  
G Time scale (This title is an hour and a half long.)  
H Audio mode  
When using Live Memory playback  
HDD  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
11:35  
11:33  
PR.12  
DVD  
FR360  
TITLE99 CHAPTER999 T. REMAIN6:59:59  
Digital  
XP  
DVD  
FISHING WORLD  
TITLE99 CHAPTER999 T. REMAIN6:59:59  
11:35  
11:33  
RAM  
PR.12  
A Playback title number  
B Playback chapter number  
C Disc remaining time  
D Current status (playback)  
E Audio mode  
FR360  
A Time scale for recording (HDD deck)  
Bar meter for recording (DVD deck)  
B Current recording point  
C Recording mode  
D Current time  
F Bar meter  
G Name of title (or play list) currently being played back  
H Current playback point  
I Recorded mode  
E Current playback channel position number  
When recording  
HDD  
F Time scale for Live Memory Playback (HDD deck)  
Bar meter for Live Memory Playback (DVD deck)  
G Current playback point  
H Live Memory playback mode  
I Current playback time  
11:00  
12:00  
13:00  
11:35  
PR.12  
FR360  
LIVE  
DVD  
TITLE99 CHAPTER999 T. REMAIN6:59:59  
11:35  
RAM  
PR.12  
FR360  
LIVE  
A Recording point  
B Current status (recording)  
C Current time  
D Recording channel number  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
EN  
15  
On-Screen Display (DV Dubbing)  
On-Screen Display (VHS deck)  
When AO.S.D.B is set to AAUTOB and ON SCREEN on the remote  
control is pressed, various operational indicators appear on the TV  
screen. To clear the operational indicators, press ON SCREEN  
again.  
When capturing images from the external DV  
equipment  
0:00  
FR360 00:00:00. 00  
12bit  
1:00  
2:00  
DV  
HDD  
GR-DV3500  
M
N
00:00:00. 00  
DV  
JVC  
GR-DV3500  
SOUND1  
A
B
C
D
W
S P  
R
L
K
P R . 1 A R D  
u
2 1  
2 4  
:
.
0
1 2  
0
A Recording speed  
.
0 4  
B HDD capacity graph  
C HDD time counter  
D Recording time scale  
E HDD mode  
F Remote control mode  
G Connected DV equipment mode  
J
I
S T  
V P S  
/
P D C  
O
N
M A R K  
E
- - - - - + - - - + - - - - + - - - - - +  
0
I
o
H
G
-
H
F
I
1
N
:
2 3  
1
:
:
4 5  
0 0  
N O R M  
R E M A  
I
F
H Connected DV equipment model information  
I Input channel  
J Sound mode  
A Operation Mode Indicators  
B Tape Speed (SP/LP)  
C Tape Direction  
D Index Mark Indicator (MARK) A pg. 42  
E Counter Display  
K Sound input bit-rate*  
* Indicates the sound bit-rate of the connected DV equipment  
L Connected DV equipment information*  
F Tape Remaining Time Indicator A pg. 45  
G Audio Mode Display A pg. 43  
H Tape Position Indicator  
* Maker name and model name, etc. may not appear depending on the  
connected equipment.  
M Time counter for the connected DV equipment  
N Sound monitor mode  
The tape position indicator  
appears on the TV screen when  
you press O or N from the  
Stop mode or perform an Index  
Search. (A pg. 43) The position  
of AZB in relation to A0B  
(Beginning) or A+B (End) shows  
you where you are on the tape.  
1
2
DV  
DV  
N
----- + - o -- + ---- + ----- +  
0
O Remote control switch  
P Auto capture button  
Q Sound monitor switch  
1 : 2 3  
R E MA I N  
:
:
4 5  
3 5  
2
End  
NOTE:  
Depending on the type of tape  
being used, the tape position  
indicator may not appear  
correctly.  
179 :59 :59  
I VPS/PDC Indicator A pg. 55  
J Type of Broadcast A pg. 45  
K Current Day/Month/Year  
L Clock Display  
R Elapsed recording time  
M Channel Position Number and Station Name/Auxiliary Input  
Indicator (L-1, L-2, F-1 or SAT*)  
* When AL-2 SELECTB is set to ASATB (A pg. 72), ASATB appears  
instead of AL-2B.  
N ACassette LoadedB Mark  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTALLING YOUR NEW UNIT  
EN  
16  
THESE STEPS MUST BE COMPLETED BEFORE ANY VIDEO  
OPERATION CAN BE PERFORMED.  
Basic Connections  
1 Make sure the package contains all of the accessories listed in  
ASPECIFICATIONSB (A pg. 94).  
2 Place the unit on a stable, horizontal surface.  
3 Connect the unit to a TV depending on the TV and cables you  
use.  
8 Basic Connection  
TV aerial cable  
To connect to a TV with 21-pin SCART input connector ^  
A Disconnect the TV aerial cable from the TV.  
B Connect the TV aerial cable to the [ANTENNA IN] connector on  
the rear panel of the unit.  
C Connect the [ANTENNA OUT] connector on the rear panel of  
the unit and the TV’s aerial connector with the supplied RF  
cable.  
Mains outlet  
To [ANTENNA IN]  
D Connect the [L-1 IN/OUT] connector on the rear panel of the  
unit and the TV’s 21-pin SCART connector with a supplied 21-  
pin SCART cable.  
The [L-1 IN/OUT] connector accepts and delivers either a  
signal.  
Mains power cord  
Back of unit  
Set your TV to the VIDEO (or AV), Y/C, or RGB mode  
according to the type of your TV’s SCART connector.  
8 Component Video Connection  
To connect to TV’s component video input connectors ^  
A Perform A C in ABasic ConnectionB.  
To [L-1 IN/  
OUT]  
To [COMPONENT  
To [AUDIO  
VIDEO OUT (Y/PB  
/
OUT]  
P
R)]  
To  
[ANTENNA  
OUT]  
B Connect the unit’s [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR)]  
connectors to the TV’s component video input connectors.  
C Connect the unit’s [AUDIO OUT] connectors to the TV’s AUDIO  
input connectors.  
Component  
video cable  
(not supplied)  
You can obtain high-quality component video pictures.  
If your TV is not stereo-capable, use the unit’s [AUDIO OUT]  
connectors to connect to an audio amplifier for Hi-Fi stereo  
21-pin SCART  
cable  
(supplied)  
Audio cable  
(not supplied)  
By using the component video connection, you can view the  
images in the progressive mode. For switching to the  
progressive mode, refer to AScan Mode SetB (A pg. 89).  
You can also watch the images on the VHS deck in Progressive  
scan mode via the component video output, refer to AVHS  
Progressive ScanB (A pg. 43).  
RF cable  
(supplied)  
TV  
NOTE:  
Select an appropriate option of AL-1 OUTPUTB as follows  
(A pg. 72):  
To 75 ohm  
terminal  
When your TV’s SCART  
Set AL-1 OUTPUTB to:  
connector accepts:  
It’s essential that your unit be properly connected.  
Composite signals  
ASCART VIDEOB  
ATTENTION:  
Your TV must have a 21-pin AV input connector (SCART) for  
the basic connection to the unit.  
Y/C signal (separated  
luminance (brightness) and  
chrominance (colour) signals)  
ASCART S-VIDEOB  
Connect the AC plug only after all connections to the TV has  
been completed.  
RGB signal  
ASCART RGBB  
Component video signal  
ACOMPONENTB  
When the setting selected is not in accordance with the TV  
connected and depending on the type of appliance connected to  
the unit, the correct picture will not appear.  
4 Plug the end of the mains power cord into a mains outlet.  
ALOADINGB blinks on the front display panel when the AC plug  
of the mains power cord is connected into a mains outlet and it  
takes approximately 50 seconds for the unit to be turned on.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
INITIAL SETTINGS  
EN  
17  
3 Press FGD E to select the  
language of your choice, then  
press ENTER. The AUTO SET/  
T-V LINK display appears on the  
TV screen.  
INITIAL SET UP > LANGUAGE SELECT  
Auto Set Up  
Auto Channel Set/Auto Clock Set/Auto Guide  
Programme Number Set  
ENGLISH  
ITALIANO  
SVENSKA  
DANSK  
DEUTSCH  
ESPAÑOL  
NORSK  
FRANCAIS  
NEDERLANDS  
SUOMI  
RETURN  
4 Press D E to select AAUTO  
SETB, then press ENTER. The  
AUTO SET screen will appear.  
When AUTO SET is completed,  
ASCAN COMPLETEDB appears  
on the TV screen. After selecting  
AOKB, APLEASE WAIT...B  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
After the A button on the unit (or DVD A on the remote  
control) is pressed for the first time to turn on the unit, by simply  
selecting your country*, the Auto Set Up function sets the tuner  
channels, clock** and Guide Programme numbers automatically.  
* If you live in Belgium (BELGIUM) or Switzerland (SUISSE), you also  
need to select your language.  
* If you live in Hungary (MAGYARORSZÁG), Czech Republic (ČESKÁ  
REPUBLIKA), Poland (POLSKA) or other countries in Eastern Europe  
(OTHER EASTERN), set the clock manually.  
INITIAL SET UP > AUTO CH SET  
AUTO SET  
T-V LINK  
appears on the screen while  
channel data is being  
transferred to the VHS deck.  
During this period  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT  
(approximately 80 seconds), the  
VHS deck is not operable. It will  
exit the AUTO SET mode once  
APLEASE WAIT...B disappears  
from the screen.  
INITIAL SET UP > AUTO SET  
AUTO SET  
PLEASE WAIT...  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
1
SELECT  
ATTENTION:  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
AAUTOB blinks on the front display panel; do NOT press any button  
on the unit or remote control until the front display panel shows  
A– –:– –B as illustrated on page 19.  
When you have connected the unit to a TV offering T-V Link via a  
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable (A pg. 16) and the TV is turned  
on, the unit automatically performs the Preset Download  
(A pg. 18) even if you select AAUTO SETB for Auto Set Up  
function.  
DVD 1  
ATTENTION:  
ENTER  
Once you have performed Auto Set Up, even if the unit’s  
Guide Programme numbers remain in the unit’s memory and the  
unit will not perform Auto Set Up again. The unit only performs  
Auto Clock Set when the unit is turned on.  
If you have moved to a different area, perform each setting as  
required.  
rtwe  
Tuner setting (A pg. 83)  
Clock setting (A pg. 86)  
If a new station starts broadcasting in your area, perform tuner  
setting. (A pg. 83)  
NOTES:  
In areas where no TV station transmits a PDC (Programme  
Delivery Control) signal, the unit can perform neither Auto Clock  
Set nor Auto Guide Programme Number Set.  
If there is a power cut, or if you press A or SET UP while Auto  
Set Up is in progress, Auto Set Up will be interrupted; be sure to  
turn off the unit power once and try again from step 1.  
Auto Clock Set may not function properly depending on the  
Before starting, make sure of the following:  
The TV aerial cable should be connected to the unit.  
The unit’s mains power cord should be connected to a mains  
outlet.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
If no sound accompanies the picture or the audio sounds  
unnatural on some channels that have been stored by Auto Set  
Up, the TV system setting for those channels may be incorrect.  
Select the appropriate TV system for those channels. (A pg. 85,  
AINFORMATIONB)  
1 Press A on the unit or DVD A on the remote control to turn  
on the unit. The Country Set display appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press FGD E to select your  
INITIAL SET UP > AREA SELECT  
country’s name, then press  
BELGIUM  
DEUTSCHLAND  
ITALIA  
ČESKÁ REPUBLIKA  
ESPAÑA  
DANMARK  
GREECE  
ENTER. The Language Set  
display appears on the TV  
screen.  
After AAuto Set UpB is completed, perform AMonitor SetB on  
page 21.  
MAGYARORSZÁG  
ÖSTERREICH  
SUISSE  
NEDERLAND  
POLSKA  
NORGE  
SUOMI  
PORTUGAL  
SVERIGE  
OTHER WESTERN  
OTHER EASTERN  
RETURN  
NOTES:  
ENTER  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
If you have selected ABELGIUMB  
or ASUISSEB, go to step 3.  
If you have selected  
SELECT  
AMAGYARORSZÁGB, AČESKÁ REPUBLIKAB, APOLSKAB or  
AOTHER EASTERNB, press ENTER. The Clock Set screen  
appears. Set the clock manually (A pg. 86), then go to step 4.  
If you have selected any other country name, go to step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
INITIAL SETTINGS  
EN  
18  
If you have connected the unit to your TV via a 21-pin SCART  
cable (A pg. 16), the unit will automatically perform Preset  
Download instead of the Auto Set Up in step 4 on page 17. After  
downloading, the unit sets the clock and Guide Programme  
numbers automatically.  
Preset Download  
Auto Channel Set by Downloading from TV/Auto Clock  
Set/Auto Guide Programme Number Set  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Perform steps 1 to 3 of AAuto Set UpB (A pg. 17) before  
continuing.  
ATTENTION:  
You can use this function only with a TV offering T-V Link, etc.*  
Be sure to use a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable.  
* Compatible with TVs offering T-V Link, EasyLink, Megalogic,  
SMARTLINK, Q-Link or DATA LOGIC via a fully-wired 21-pin SCART  
cable. The degree of compatibility and available functions may differ by  
system.  
1 Press D E to select AT-V LINKB  
INITIAL SET UP > AUTO CH SET  
and press ENTER. The T-V  
LINK screen will appear.  
AUTO SET  
T-V LINK  
When T-V LINK is completed,  
ASCAN COMPLETEDB appears  
on the TV screen. After selecting  
AOKB, APLEASE WAIT...B  
appears on the screen while  
channel data is being  
CABLE/SAT  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
TV  
DVD  
SELECT  
INITIAL SET UP > T-V LINK  
transferred to the VHS deck.  
During this period  
(approximately 80 seconds), the  
VHS deck is not operable. It will  
exit the T-V LINK mode once  
APLEASE WAIT...B disappears  
from the screen.  
T-V LINK  
PLEASE WAIT...  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT  
ENTER  
we  
ATTENTION:  
Preset positions on the front display panel increase from APR 1B;  
do NOT press any button on the unit or remote control until the  
front display panel shows clock time, APR 1B or A– –:– –B as  
illustrated on page 19.  
If you press any button on the unit or remote control while  
downloading is in progress, it will be interrupted.  
NOTES:  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of your TV.  
In the area where no TV station transmits a PDC (Programme  
Delivery Control) signal, the unit can perform neither Auto Clock  
Set nor Auto Guide Programme Number Set.  
If there is a power cut, or if you press A or SET UP while  
downloading or set up is in progress, it will be interrupted; be  
sure to turn off the unit power once and try again from the  
beginning.  
On this unit, the characters available for station names (ID) are  
A–Z, 0–9, –, Z, + and & (space). Some names of downloaded  
stations may differ from those of your TV. (A pg. 85)  
After APreset DownloadB is completed, perform AMonitor SetB on  
page 21.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INITIAL SETTINGS  
EN  
19  
INFORMATION  
Results Of Auto Set Up/Preset Download Appearing  
On The Front Display Panel  
Language for the on-screen display  
Auto Set Up also selects the language automatically for the on-  
screen display depending on the Country setting you have made in  
step 2 on page 17 (unless you have selected ABELGIUMB or  
ASUISSEB), as shown below.  
If both Auto Channel Set and  
Auto Clock Set have been  
performed successfully, the  
SUOMI  
B SUOMI  
ITALIA  
B ITALIANO  
correct current time is displayed.  
Turn on the TV and select its AV mode, then make sure that all  
necessary stations have been stored in the unit’s memory by using  
the PR +/– button(s).  
If station names (ID – A pg. 98) have also been stored in the  
unit’s memory, the station name will be displayed at the top right  
corner of the TV screen for about 5 seconds when the unit is  
tuned to a different station.  
If you want to set the tuner manually such as to add or skip  
channels, to change channel positions, or to set or change  
station names, see pages 84 – 85.  
PORTUGAL  
B ENGLISH  
MAGYARORSZÁG B ENGLISH  
DEUTSCHLAND B DEUTSCH  
ESPAÑA  
B ESPAÑOL  
POLSKA  
B ENGLISH  
B NORSK  
NEDERLAND  
GREECE  
B NEDERLANDS  
B ENGLISH  
NORGE  
SVERIGE  
DANMARK  
ÖSTERREICH  
B DANSK  
OTHER WESTERN B ENGLISH  
B DEUTSCH  
B ENGLISH  
OTHER EASTERN B ENGLISH  
ČESKÁ  
REPUBLIKA  
If you want to change the language setting manually, see AOn-  
screen Language SetB (A pg. 20).  
If Auto Channel Set has  
succeeded but Auto Clock Set  
has not, APR 1B (channel  
position) is displayed.  
Just Clock  
Your unit is equipped with the Just Clock function which provides  
accurate time keeping through automatic adjustments at regular  
intervals, by reading data from a PDC signal. If you want to take  
advantage of this function, simply set it to AONB. (A pg. 86)  
OR  
If both Auto Channel Set and Auto Clock Set have failed,  
A– –:– –B is displayed.  
A Turn on the TV and select its AV mode, then make sure that all  
necessary stations have been stored in the unit’s memory by  
using the PR +/– button(s).  
If station names (ID – A pg. 98) have also been stored in the  
unit’s memory, the station name will be displayed at the top  
right corner of the TV screen for about 5 seconds when the unit  
is tuned to a different station.  
If you want to set the tuner manually such as to add or skip  
channels, to change channel positions, or to set or change  
T-V Link Functions  
When you connect the unit to your TV via a fully-wired 21-pin  
SCART cable (A pg. 16), the following functions are available.  
You can use these functions only with a TV offering T-V Link, etc.*  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of your TV.  
* Compatible with TVs offering T-V Link, EasyLink, Megalogic, SMARTLINK,  
Q-Link or DATA LOGIC via a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable. The degree  
of compatibility and available functions may differ by system.  
TV Auto Power On  
The TV will turn on and be set to its AV mode automatically  
whenever you start playback.  
B Perform AClock SetB (A pg. 86).  
ATTENTION:  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of your TV.  
After making sure the cables are connected properly, turn off the  
unit’s power once, then turn the unit’s power back on again.  
The Country Set display appears on the TV screen; perform AAuto  
Set UpB (A pg. 17) or APreset DownloadB (A pg. 18) again.  
Unit Auto Standby  
You can use your TV’s remote control to turn off the unit.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of your TV.  
IMPORTANT:  
Direct Rec  
To check if the Guide Programme numbers have been set  
correctly, perform the a Timer Programming.  
(A pg. 49, 54)  
You can easily start recording the programme that you are  
watching on your TV. When you use this function, set ADIRECT  
RECB to AONB. (A pg. 79)  
In certain reception conditions, station names may not be stored  
correctly, and auto Guide Programme Number Set may not work  
properly. If the Guide Programme numbers are not set properly  
when you timer-record a TV programme using the a  
system, the unit will record a TV programme of a different  
station. When programming the timer using the a  
system, be sure to check the desired channel is selected  
correctly. (A pg. 49, 54)  
Your unit memorizes all detected stations even if reception of  
some of them is poor. You can delete those stations with an  
unacceptable picture. (A pg. 85, ADelete A ChannelB)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INITIAL SETTINGS  
EN  
20  
On-screen Language Set  
This unit offers you the choice to view on-screen messages in 10  
different languages.  
Language  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
1 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
the unit.  
2 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
3 Press D E to select AFUNCTION SET UPB, then press G.  
4 Press D E to select ADISPLAY  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
SETB, then press G.  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
DISPLAY SET  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
HDD  
DVD  
SUPERIMPOSE  
BLUE BACK  
DIMMER  
AUTO  
5 Press F G to select AON  
SCREEN LANGUAGEB, then  
press ENTER.  
ON  
BRIGHT  
OFF  
POWER SAVE  
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
ENGLISH  
6 Press F G to select your desired  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
language, then press ENTER.  
SELECT  
7 Press SET UP to complete the  
setting.  
ENTER  
rtwe  
Menu/Audio/Subtitle Language Set (DVD deck only)  
Some DVD discs contain the DVD menu display, audio and  
subtitles in multiple languages. With these discs, you can set the  
default language as you like.  
The procedure shows how to set AMENU LANGUAGEB as an  
example.  
SET UP  
1 Press DVD so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
2 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
3 Press D E to select ADVD VIDEO SET UPB, then press G.  
4 Press D E to select  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
ALANGUAGE SETB, then press  
G.  
LANGUAGE SET  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
PARENTAL LOCK DISC PLAY SET UP  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
ENGLISH  
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
5 Press F G to select AMENU  
LANGUAGEB, then press  
ENTER.  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
6 Press F G to select your desired  
SELECT  
language, then press ENTER.  
See ALanguage Code ListB (A pg. 95).  
7 Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
NOTE:  
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the disc’s  
default menu language is played back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
INITIAL SETTINGS  
EN  
21  
1 Press DVD so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
2 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
Monitor Set  
You cannot set the monitor type during recording or playback.  
3 Press D E to select AFUNCTION SET UPB, then press G.  
4 Press D E to select AVIDEO IN/  
You can select the monitor type depending on the TV used when  
you play back DVD VIDEO discs recorded for wide-screen TVs.  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
OUTB, then press G.  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
DISPLAY SET  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
MONITOR TYPE  
4:3LB  
VIDEO  
5 Press F G to select AMONITOR  
F-1 INPUT  
L-1 OUTPUT  
L-1 INPUT  
L-2 SELECT  
TYPEB, then press ENTER.  
SCART VIDEO  
VIDEO  
6 Press F G to select the desired  
option, then press ENTER.  
CABLE/SAT  
VIDEO  
TV  
DVD  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
7 Press SET UP to complete the  
setting.  
DVD  
* The boldface settings below indicate the settings at your purchase.  
8 MONITOR TYPE - 4:3LB / 4:3PS / 16:9AUTO / 16:9FIX  
4:3LB (Letter Box conversion):  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear  
on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
ENTER  
rtwe  
4:3PS (Pan&Scan):  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not  
be shown on the screen.  
16:9AUTO (Wide television conversion):  
SET UP  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide TV).  
16:9FIX (Wide television conversion):  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is fixed to 16:9  
(wide TV). The unit automatically adjusts the screen width of  
the output signal correctly when playing back a picture whose  
aspect ratio is 4:3.  
Pan&Scan/Letter Box  
In general, DVD VIDEO disc are produced for a wide-screen TV  
with 16:9 aspect ratio.  
Material with this ratio will not fit to a TV with 4:3 aspect ratio.  
There are two styles to display the image, APan&ScanB (PS) and  
ALetter BoxB (LB).  
Pan&Scan  
The right and left side of the image are cut off.  
The image fills the screen.  
The picture will be shown in the A4:3LBB  
mode depending on the disc even if the  
A4:3PSB mode is selected.  
Letter Box  
Black bands appear at the top and bottom of  
the image. The image itself appears in 16:9  
aspect ratio.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
SAT CONTROL SET  
EN  
22  
The following procedure is required if you receive satellite  
channels through a satellite receiver. Approximately 20 seconds  
before the a timer programming (A pg. 49) or Manual  
Timer programming (A pg. 51) starts, the unit sets its input mode  
to AL-2B and automatically switches the satellite receiver’s channels  
using the provided Satellite Controller.  
Satellite Receiver Control Setting  
(HDD & DVD Deck Only)  
Satellite receiver  
Installing Satellite Controller  
1 Place the Satellite Controller so that the path between its  
transmitter and the satellite receiver’s remote sensor is  
unobstructed.  
2 Fix securely using the adhesive strip attached on the back of  
the Satellite Controller.  
3 Be sure to connect the unit’s [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector to  
the satellite receiver’s 21-pin SCART connector.  
NOTE:  
Satellite Controller  
When connecting your satellite receiver, refer to its instruction  
manual.  
(provided)  
(suggested locations)  
Your unit  
4 Connect the Satellite Controller to the [SAT CONTROL]  
connector on the rear panel.  
Transmitter  
Setting Satellite Receiver’s Brand And Channel  
Satellite receiver  
After installation, set the satellite receiver’s brand and channel  
correctly; otherwise, the Satellite Controller cannot work correctly.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
1 Turn on the satellite receiver’s power.  
2 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
21-pin SCART cable  
(supplied)  
Satellite Controller (supplied)  
To [SAT CONTROL]  
the unit.  
3 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
4 Press D E to select AINITIAL SET UPB, then press G.  
5 Press D E to select ATUNER  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
SETB, then press G.  
TUNER SET  
CLOCK SET  
To [L-2 IN/  
DECODER]  
AUTO CH SET  
MANUAL CH SET  
6 Press FGD E to select ASAT  
CONTROL SETB, then press  
ENTER.  
SAT CONTROL SET  
GUIDE PROG SET  
11  
12  
13  
7 Press F G to select ABRANDB,  
SET UP  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
then press ENTER.  
SELECT  
8 Press F G to select the brand  
Back of unit  
code from the list on page 23, then press ENTER.  
If the unit is in playback or recording mode, you cannot set the  
brand code.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
9 Press F G to select APROGRAMMEB, then press ENTER.  
10Press F G to select one of the channel positions on the  
HDD  
DVD  
satellite receiver, then press ENTER.  
You can select the channel position between 1 to 999.  
11Press F G to select ATESTB,  
INITIAL SET UP > SAT CONTROL SET  
then press ENTER. The unit  
BRAND  
73  
12  
enters the Test mode.  
PROGRAMME  
ENTER  
TEST  
rtwe  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SET UP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
SAT CONTROL SET  
EN  
23  
12Check the result of the test.  
If the satellite receiver’s channel number has been changed to  
the same one as you set in step 10  
Press D E to select AYESB, then press ENTER to finish the Sat  
Control Set mode.  
If the satellite receiver’s channel number has not been  
changed correctly  
Press D E to select ANOB, then press ENTER. Then perform the  
procedure again from step 7.  
BRAND NAME  
CODE  
JVC  
73  
AMSTRAD  
ASTON  
60, 61, 62, 63, 92  
97  
CANAL SATELLITE  
CANAL +  
D-BOX  
81  
81  
85  
ECHOSTAR (VIA DIGITAL)  
FINLUX  
82  
68  
FORCE  
89  
GALAXIS  
GRUNDIG  
HIRSCHMANN  
HUMAX  
88  
64, 65, 102  
64, 78, 99  
88  
ITT NOKIA  
JERROLD  
KATHREIN  
LUXOR  
68  
75  
70, 71, 96  
68  
MASCOM  
MASPRO  
NOKIA  
93  
70  
87, 94  
PACE  
65, 67, 74, 86, 92, 97  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
RADIX  
74, 92  
66, 84, 101  
78  
RFT  
69  
SABA  
97  
SAGEM  
83, 90  
68  
83  
SALORA  
SAMSUNG  
SIEMENS  
SKYMASTER  
TECHNISAT  
THOMSON  
TPS  
64  
69, 98  
66, 100  
97  
83  
TRIAX  
91  
WISI  
64  
NOTES:  
The Satellite Controller may not work with all types of satellite  
receiver.  
For some satellite receivers, you need to set its channel input  
mode to 2-digit.  
If your satellite receiver has more than two channel modes, be  
sure to set to AAll Channel ModeB. For details, refer to the  
instruction manual of the satellite receiver.  
When selecting the satellite receiver’s channel (A step 10),  
signals from the remote control may interfere with signals  
transmitted from the Satellite Controller. In this case, move the  
remote control as close to the unit’s infrared beam receiving  
window as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
24  
To play back an MP3/JPEG disc, see APlayback With MP3/WMA/  
JPEG NavigationB (A pg. 63).  
Basic Playback  
1 Load a disc.  
For details, refer to APlacing A DiscB (A pg. 8).  
Pressing I also closes the disc tray.  
Playback begins automatically if an auto-playback DVD disc is  
loaded.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
2 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or DVD  
on the remote so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 Press I to start playback.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
If you load a DVD disc whose region code does not match the  
unit, AREGION CODE ERRORB appears on the TV screen. For  
details, refer to ARegion NumberB (A pg. 6).  
I
M
SELECT  
If ACAN NOT PLAY BACK DISC UNDER CURRENT SETTINGB  
With Video CD/SVCD discs with PBC control or some DVD  
discs, the menu display may appear on the TV screen after  
starting playback. In this case, select an item which you want to  
play back from the menu. Otherwise, the playback cannot go  
forward. Refer to APlayback Control (PBC) FunctionB (A pg. 28)  
or ALocating A Desired Scene Using The DVD MenuB  
(A pg. 25).  
o
W
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
The Library Database Navigation also enables you to search  
and select the desired titles. (A pg. 58)  
DVD  
4 Press W to pause playback.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
5 Press o to stop playback.  
When a recordable disc is played, playback stops and a  
programme received with the unit’s tuner resumes on the TV  
screen.  
ENTER  
When a playback-only disc is played, playback stops and the  
still image at the time you press o remains on the TV screen.  
Pressing o again resumes a programme received with the  
unit’s tuner.  
If M is pressed during playback, playback stops, then the disc  
tray opens.  
I
o
W
NOTES:  
When the Library Database Navigation screen appears, choose  
a thumbnail image of the desired title on the TV screen, then  
press ENTER. (A pg. 58)  
It is not possible to playback the DVD disc recorded in 96 kHz on  
DVD during recording or Live Memory Playback on HDD.  
ATTENTION:  
It takes approximately 30 seconds to read a disc depending on  
the type and condition of the disc since this unit is multi-disc  
compatible (DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, DVD-R). It may even take  
several minutes when a disc is dirty, scratched or warped.  
It may take a few seconds to start playback. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Forward/reverse high-speed search and other operations  
cannot be performed while playback is stopped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
25  
Locating The Start Point Of The Item Or Skip The Item  
Playback Features  
Turn on the unit.  
Press S or T during playback.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press DVD so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
Pressing T locates the start point of the item or skips the item  
in the forward direction, then resumes playback.  
Pressing S locates the start point of the item or skips the item  
in the reverse direction, then resumes playback.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
When a DVD-RAM/RW/R disc is played  
Current programme  
DVD  
0-9  
Previous  
programme  
Next  
programme  
News  
Drama  
Movie  
TOP MENU  
ENTER  
FGDE  
T
Reverse  
: marked points (A pg. 27)  
Forward  
MENU  
S
I
Example:  
5/SLOW +  
W
v
O/SLOW  
-
To locate the beginning of the next item, press T once.  
To locate the beginning of the current item, press S once.  
To locate the beginning of the previous item, press S three  
times.  
o
JUMP  
-
JUMP +  
When a DVD VIDEO, Audio CD or Video CD/SVCD disc is  
played  
Playback point  
Locating A Desired Scene Using The DVD Menu  
Scene 3  
(Chapter 3)  
or  
Scene 4  
(Chapter 4)  
or  
Scene 2  
(Chapter 2)  
or  
DVD VIDEO discs may have top menu and disc menu.  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 2  
Top menu  
DVD discs generally have their own menus which show the disc  
contents. These menus contain various items such as titles of a  
movie, names of songs, or artist information. You can locate a  
desired scene by using the top menu displayed on the TV screen.  
Press TOP MENU to access the top menu.  
Forward  
Reverse  
Example:  
To locate the beginning of the next item, press T once.  
To locate the beginning of the current item, press S once.  
Disc menu  
Disc menus include playback data (angle menu, subtitle menu,  
etc.) specific to each title.  
Press MENU to access the disc menu.  
Variable Speed Search  
1 Press TOP MENU or MENU to  
access the DVD menu.  
During playback, press N for forward variable speed search, or  
O for reverse variable speed search.  
Each press of the button increases the search speed for each  
direction.  
2 Press FGD E to select a  
desired title, then press  
ENTER. Playback starts.  
It may be possible to select the  
desired item using the number  
keys depending on the menu  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
For Audio CD  
display.  
Example:  
You can perform 4 levels of speed search with N and O. (Audio  
is active also during variable speed search.) You cannot perform  
slow motion for each direction.  
NOTE:  
When A7B appears on the TV screen in step 1, the disc does not  
have a top menu or disc menu.  
Reverse  
O
N
Forward  
Reverse  
SlowMotion  
3 steps  
Reverse Search  
4 steps  
Reverse  
Play  
Slow Motion  
3 steps  
Normal Forward Search  
Play  
4 steps  
1
-
116  
-
½
-
60  
-60 -15 -5 -3  
-1  
1
3
5
15  
½
¼
¼
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
26  
Still Picture/Frame-By-Frame Playback  
Resume Function  
It is possible to memorise the position where you stop playback  
and resume playback from that position.  
Be sure to set ARESUMEB to AONB or ADISC RESUMEB.  
(A pg. 79)  
Resume function always works for DVD-RAM regardless of the  
setting of ARESUMEB.  
1 Press W to pause during playback.  
2 Press SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) to activate frame-by-  
frame playback.  
Each press of SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) advances/  
reverses the still picture frame by frame.  
Frame-by-frame playback for reverse direction cannot be  
performed with Video CD/SVCD discs.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
1 Press o during playback to memorise a resume point.  
The unit enters Resume Stop mode and memorises the  
position where you have stopped playback as a resume point.  
(The inside of the disc status indicator on the front display panel  
blinks while memorising.)  
Slow Motion  
The unit retains a memory of the resume points of the last 30  
discs played back, even though they have been ejected if  
ARESUMEB is set to ADISC RESUMEB. (A pg. 79)  
To clear the resume points:  
(The inside of the disc status indicator stops blinking and  
lights.)  
When ARESUMEB is set to AONB:  
• Press A to turn off the unit.  
• Press M to take out the disc.  
• Press o in stop mode.  
1 Press W to pause during playback.  
2 Press SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) for 2 or more seconds.  
Each press of SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) increases the  
slow motion speed for each direction.  
Slow motion for reverse direction cannot be performed with  
Video CD/SVCD discs.  
• Press TOP MENU to display the top menu, then start playback  
Skip Search  
by selecting an item, etc.  
• Press MENU to display the disc menu, then start playback by  
selecting an item, etc.  
When ARESUMEB is set to ADISC RESUMEB:  
• Set ARESUMEB to AOFFB. (A pg. 79)  
During playback, press v.  
Each press initiates an approximately 30-second period of fast-  
motion playback. Normal playback resumes automatically.  
• Press o in stop mode.  
• Press TOP MENU to display the top menu, then start playback  
by selecting an item, etc.  
Jump Search  
• Press MENU to display the disc menu, then start playback by  
selecting an item, etc.  
2 Press I in stop mode to resume playback. The unit starts  
playback from the resume point.  
You can locate a scene ahead or behind the current one by  
jumping scenes according to selected time intervals (A pg. 79)  
during playback (or Live Memory Playback).  
NOTES:  
ADISC RESUMEB setting works on DVD VIDEO, VCD, SVCD and  
already finalised DVD-R/DVD-RW (video mode) discs. For other  
types of discs, the function under AONB setting will be applied  
even if ARESUMEB is set to ADISC RESUMEB. (A pg. 79)  
If you stop the playback of a disc for which a resume point has  
already been memorised, the memory will be updated with the  
new resume point.  
Press JUMP – or JUMP +.  
To advance forward or back, press JUMP – or JUMP +  
repeatedly within 5 seconds of each press to continue jump.  
Depending on the time from where you want to start jump search,  
the first press of JUMP – or JUMP + will not necessarily lead to a  
jump of the selected time interval. The first press will lead to a  
jump to the nearest quarter points of an hour (15 min/ 30 min/ 45  
min/ 00 min). The subsequent jumps will then be in accordance  
to the selected time interval.  
After the unit has memorised the resume points for 30 discs,  
remembering a new resume point will cause the unit to delete the  
oldest memorised point. Stopping playback of a disc for which a  
resume point is already stored may change the order in which the  
points are stored. This may potentially change the order in which  
points are deleted.  
When the unit memorises a resume point for a disc, it also  
remembers audio language, subtitle and angle settings.  
This function may not work for some Video CD/SVCDs.  
When ARESUMEB is changed to AONB or AOFFB (A pg. 79),  
resume points of the discs memorised with ARESUMEB set to  
ADISC RESUMEB will be cleared.  
Resume points are memorised for each side of a double-sided  
disc.  
When you switch to HDD during CD playback, playback stops.  
The Resume Function doesn’t work when you switch to DVD  
thereafter to playback the disc.  
When you cannot advance any further (beginning or end of  
programme reached), the message AUNABLE TO GO BACK  
ANY MOREB appears on the screen and the on-air screen  
resumes. In such a case, press S, O or o.  
Example:  
Playback search when jump interval is set to 15 MIN jumps.  
Taking for instance, you want to start jump search 40 minutes after  
the beginning of the programme. Pressing JUMP – or JUMP + will  
result a jump to the scene at the 30 minutes point or 45 minutes point  
respectively as illustrated below. At the subsequent press, the scene  
will jump to the 15 minutes point or 1 hour point respectively,  
according to the selected time interval, which in this case is  
A15 MINB.  
Time counter  
0 min  
40 min  
45 min  
30 min  
1 h 15 min  
1 h  
15 min  
Beginning of programme  
Current scene  
End of programme  
NOTE:  
Jump search cannot be performed with finalised DVD-R/DVD-RW  
(video mode) discs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
27  
Checking The Time Information  
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
DVD  
You can check time information of a disc on the front display panel  
and the TV screen.  
0-9  
Each press of DISPLAY changes the display as follows:  
8 DVD-RAM/DVD-R/DVD-RW  
During recording  
MARK  
Clock time (front display panel only) N Current title elapsed time  
N Disc remaining time* N (back to the beginning)  
* only discs before finalising  
ENTER  
rtwe  
Clock time is displayed only when a recordable disc is recorded.  
MENU  
RETURN  
During playback  
S/PREVIOUS  
T/NEXT  
Each title elapsed time N Current title elapsed time N  
Disc remaining time* N (back to the beginning)  
* only discs before finalising  
I
o
REMAIN  
DISPLAY  
In stop mode or during playback  
It is possible to check disc remaining time according to recording  
modes also by pressing REMAIN.  
SET UP  
In FR mode, it is possible to set recording time in detail. While the  
recording mode and the disc remaining time are displayed by  
pressing REMAIN, press F G to select AFRB, then press D E to  
select the desired recording time. (A pg. 36)  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
It is not possible to switch the recording mode during playback or  
while recording.  
Marking Positions To Play Back Again Later  
8 Video CD/SVCD/Audio CD  
During playback  
Current track elapsed time N Current track remaining time N Total  
elapsed time N Total remaining time N (back to the beginning)  
It is possible to mark positions (up to 999 points) where you want  
to play back once again later, and start playback from a marked  
position. Marking onto DVD-RAM/RW (VR mode only) discs when  
recording is helpful to locate a start point when you play back the  
discs later.  
In stop mode  
0:00 N Playback time of track 1 N 0:00 N Total length of a disc N  
(back to the beginning)  
NOTE:  
When a PBC-compatible Video CD/SVCD disc is loaded,  
deactivate the PBC function. (A pg. 28)  
To mark positions:  
During playback, press MARK at  
positions you want to mark.  
AMARKB appears on the TV screen.  
You can easily locate the marked  
positions using S or T when  
you play back the disc.  
Angle Selection  
To delete the marked positions:  
While paused, press S or T to  
locate a marked position you want to  
delete, then press MARK.  
Crossed AMARKB appears on the  
TV screen, and the marked position  
is deleted.  
You can enjoy a variety of scene angles if a DVD VIDEO disc  
contains Amulti-angleB parts, where the same scene was shot from  
different angles.  
If the disc contains Amulti-angleB parts, AyB appears on the TV  
screen at the beginning of the Amulti-angleB part.  
1 Press ANGLE during  
playback. The angle selection  
NOTES:  
display appears on the TV  
When 3 scene angles are  
screen.  
When a monaural programme changes to a stereo programme  
while recording, a mark signal is automatically recorded.  
Titles will be divided into AchaptersB at the marked points  
according to the disc types as follows:  
contained.  
2 Press ANGLE or D E to select  
your desired angle.  
Each time you press ANGLE or D E, the angle changes.  
When A7B appears on the TV screen, the current scene is not  
recorded from multiple angles. In addition, some discs prohibit  
angle selection.  
To clear the angle selection display, press ENTER. In addition,  
the angle selection display disappears automatically if no  
operation is done for 10 seconds.  
DVD-R/RW (Video mode): After finalising, titles are divided into  
AchaptersB at the marked points that are marked automatically  
approximately every 5 minutes during recording before finalising.  
(A pg. 88)  
DVD-RW (VR mode): After finalising, titles are divided into  
AchaptersB at the marked points that are marked at the desired  
locations during playback before finalising. (A pg. 88)  
DVD-RAM: Titles are divided into AchaptersB at the marked points  
that are marked at the desired locations during playback.  
DVD VIDEO: Creating of marked points are not permitted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
28  
Subtitle Selection  
Audio Language/Sound Selection  
Some DVD VIDEO discs contain more than one subtitle language,  
from among which you can choose the desired subtitle language.  
AhB appears on the TV screen at the beginning of the part where  
more than one subtitle language are recorded.  
Some DVD VIDEO discs contain the multiple audio language or  
sound. You can select the desired audio language or sound. For  
some Video CD/SVCD discs, you can switch the audio channel to  
choose Karaoke either with or without the vocal.  
1 Press SUBTITLE during  
1 Press AUDIO during playback.  
For example: DVD VIDEO  
ENGLISH  
playback. The subtitle  
The Audio Language/Sound  
selection display appears.  
selection display appears on  
the TV screen.  
Each time you press  
SUBTITLE, the subtitle display  
is switched on and off.  
When 3 subtitle languages are  
contained.  
2 Press AUDIO or D E to select  
When 3 audio languages are  
contained.  
your desired audio language/  
sound.  
Each time you press AUDIO or D E, the audio language/sound  
changes.  
To clear the Audio Language/Sound selection display, press  
ENTER.  
2 Press D E to select your desired language.  
To clear the subtitle selection display, press ENTER.  
NOTES:  
When A7B appears on the TV screen, no subtitle language is  
NOTES:  
recorded.  
When A7B appears on the TV screen, no audio language is  
recorded.  
When the subtitle language won’t be changed with the procedure  
above, change the subtitle on a disc menu displayed by pressing  
MENU.  
When the audio language won’t be changed with the procedure  
above, change the audio on a disc menu displayed by pressing  
MENU.  
Pressing AUDIO to select the audio language/sound is only  
possible during playback. It is not possible to select by pressing  
AUDIO in stop mode. However, you can select the desired audio  
language/sound from the setup menu while in stop mode.  
Audio Channel Selection  
When watching bilingual programmes or playing discs on which  
you recorded bilingual or stereo programmes, you can choose the  
desired audio channel.  
Playback Control (PBC) Function  
When ASUPERIMPOSEB is set to AAUTOB, you can confirm on  
the TV screen the audio channel you have chosen. (A pg. 80)  
Each time you press AUDIO, the audio  
channel changes.  
Some Video CD/SVCD discs support the PBC function. PBC is an  
abbreviation of APlay Back ControlB. A Video CD/SVCD disc  
recorded with PBC has its own menus, such as a list of the songs  
on the disc. You can locate a specific scene by using the menu.  
TRACK  
USE  
On-Screen Display  
1 Press I in stop mode. The PBC menu appears.  
For main audio of bilingual programme  
For sub audio of bilingual programme  
For stereo discs  
2 Press the number keys to enter the number of the desired  
scene. The unit starts playback of the selected item.  
APBCB appears on the front display panel.  
When ANEXTB or APREVIOUSB appears on the TV screen:  
Pressing NEXT(T) advances to the next page.  
For audio of left channel  
Pressing PREVIOUS(S) returns to the previous page.  
You can return to the menu by pressing RETURN.  
The method of the operation is different depending on the disc.  
For audio of right channel  
NOTE:  
It is not possible for DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video mode) disc playback  
to switch the audio channel. The audio channel is played back as  
set in AVIDEO MODE RECORDING AUDIOB setting. (A pg. 79)  
NOTES:  
If you want to playback a PBC-compatible Video CD/SVCD disc  
without activating the PBC function, start playback in stop mode  
by using the number keys, instead of the I button, to choose the  
track, then press ENTER.  
When you can’t switch the audio channel of a bilingual  
programme  
To activate the PBC function when a PBC-compatible Video CD/  
SVCD disc is being played back without the PBC function, press  
TOP MENU, or press o then press I.  
When the unit is connected with a digital audio device using an  
optional optical cable and ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB is set to  
ADOLBY DIGITAL/PCMB, it is not possible to switch the audio  
channel of a bilingual programme recorded on a DVD-RAM or  
DVD-RW (VR mode) disc. (A pg. 77) In this case, perform the  
following steps using the remote control to switch ADIGITAL  
AUDIO OUTB from ADOLBY DIGITAL/PCMB to APCM ONLYB.  
A Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
B Press D E to select ADVD VIDEO SET UPB, then press G.  
C Press D E to select AAUDIO OUTPUTB, then press G.  
D Press F G to select ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB, then press  
ENTER.  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position slightly.  
Press w.  
Each press skips back for approximately 7 seconds and resumes  
playback.  
Pressing while paused skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
and resumes pause.  
E Press F G to select APCM ONLYB, then press ENTER.  
(A pg. 78)  
F Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
G Press AUDIO to select the desired audio channel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
29  
B Select this for Repeat Playback. (A pg. 29)  
C Select this for A-B Repeat Playback. (A pg. 30)  
D Select this for search function. (A pg. 30)  
E Select this for time search function. (A pg. 31)  
Using The On-screen Bar  
F Select this to switch Simulated Surround Effect function.  
(A pg. 31)  
H Select this to switch picture source type. (A pg. 32)  
I Current status area for the selected item.  
J Select this for Programme Playback. (A pg. 32)  
K Select this for Random Playback. (A pg. 32)  
The on-screen bar allows you to control various playback  
functions. Some of the functions operated on Navigation Menu can  
be controlled on the On-screen bar.  
ATTENTION:  
The on-screen bar can also be used for the HDD deck.  
L Select this to control the switching interval of the slide show.  
(A pg. 32)  
Be sure to clear Library Database Navigation screen by pressing  
NAVIGATION.  
NOTE:  
Although examples of the on-screen bar are provided here only for  
3 types of discs, the on-screen bar will be displayed for whichever  
disc indicated in the left column.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
Basic Operation On The On-screen Bar  
Example: When selecting Picture Control function of DVD  
During playback or while stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar. The  
item currently selected is highlighted and pointed by :.  
NAVIGATION  
rtwe  
RETURN  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
ENTER  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
2 Press D E to select A  
B, then press ENTER. The pop-up  
window appears under the selected item.  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
ON SCREEN  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
3 Press F G to select the desired option, then press ENTER.  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
How To Access The On-screen Bar  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice whenever a disc is loaded.  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
SHARP  
SOFT  
Contents of the on-screen bar during playback  
DVD VIDEO  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
NOTE:  
See the corresponding pages for details on each menu item.  
Repeat Playback  
Video CD/SVCD  
TRACK 99  
EACH 0:00  
CINEMA  
You can repeat playback as you like according to the type of disc.  
VCD  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select AxB, then press ENTER. The pop-up  
window appears under the selected item.  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
JPEG disc  
GROUP 99 TRACK 99  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
5 SEC.  
JPEG  
3 Press F G repeatedly to select the desired Repeat mode, then  
press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
30  
DVD-RAM/RW/R  
To cancel A-B Repeat Playback  
Press D E to select AA-B xB, then press ENTER.  
OFF:  
Repeat playback is not performed.  
NOTES:  
A-B Repeat Playback may not work properly depending on the  
type of disc being used.  
ALL REPEAT:  
The whole disc is played back repeatedly.  
The subtitles recorded around the A-B point may not appear.  
When the end of the item is reached before the end point is set,  
the on-screen bar disappears from the TV screen. In such a  
case, repeat the procedure from step 1.  
TITLE REPEAT:  
The current title is played back repeatedly.  
DVD VIDEO  
The point B must be set at least 3 seconds after the point A.  
When playing back a DVD, A-B Repeat Playback is possible only  
within the same title.  
AA-BxB cannot be selected during Programme and Random  
Playback.  
OFF:  
Repeat playback is not performed.  
TITLE REPEAT:  
The current title is played back repeatedly.  
CHAPTER REPEAT:  
AA-BxB cannot be selected while stopped.  
The current chapter is played back repeatedly.  
Locating The Beginning Of A Desired Selection  
Audio CD/Video CD/SVCD/JPEG/MP3  
OFF:  
Repeat playback is not performed.  
ALL REPEAT:  
You can locate the beginning of a title, chapter, group or track.  
During playback or while stopped  
The whole disc is played back repeatedly.  
TRACK REPEAT*:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select A9B, then press ENTER.  
The current track is played back repeatedly.  
* ATRACK REPEATB cannot be selected for JPEG discs.  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
3 Press F G to select the desired item, then press ENTER.  
Skip this step for Video CD/SVCD and Audio CD.  
To cancel Repeat Playback  
Repeat the above procedure from step 1, select AOFFB in step 3,  
then press ENTER.  
For DVD-RAM/RW/R, DVD VIDEO  
ATITLE SEARCHB or ACHAPTER SEARCHB is selectable. (ATITLE  
SEARCHB is selectable only while stopped.)  
NOTES:  
For JPEG, MP3  
AGROUP SEARCHB or ATRACK SEARCHB is selectable.  
Repeat Playback is not possible for a Video CD/SVCD with PBC  
function.  
For Video CD/SVCD, Audio CD  
ATRACKB is selectable.  
Repeat Playback may not work properly depending on the type of  
the disc being used.  
GROUP 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 179:59  
A-B Repeat Playback  
5
CINEMA  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
TITLE SEARCH  
CHAPTER SEARCH  
You can repeat the desired part.  
During playback  
4 Press the number keys to enter the desired item number, then  
press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the selected section.  
Examples:  
A To select track 5, press the number key A5B.  
B To select track 15, press the number key A1B and A5B.  
C To select track 25, press the number key A2B, then A5B.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select AA-B xB.  
3 Press ENTER at the beginning of the desired part you want to  
repeat (point A). The elapsed playing time of the point A  
appears.  
If you have specified a wrong selection  
Press RETURN on the remote control and repeat the above  
procedures from step 2.  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
A
1 : 25 : 58  
B
:
:
NOTES:  
4 Press ENTER at the end of the desired part you want to repeat  
(point B). The elapsed playing time of the point B appears.  
The selected part of the disc (between point A and B) is played  
repeatedly.  
When A7B is displayed on the TV screen in step 4, the chapter  
you have selected is not contained in the disc, or chapter search  
does not work on the disc.  
Before you press ENTER, playback may start automatically when  
you enter the section’s number depending on the disc.  
This function is not possible for a Video CD/SVCD with PBC  
function.  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
A
1 : 25 : 58  
B
1 : 40 : 00  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
31  
Simulated Surround Effect  
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
It is possible to get a simulated surround effect from your stereo  
system. You can enjoy the virtual surround sound with your 2-  
channel stereo system.  
0-9  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
CANCEL  
2 Press D E to select A  
B, then press ENTER.  
A3D-ONB appears above the selected item and Simulated  
Surround Effect is activated.  
Each time you press ENTER, A3D-ONB appears and disappears  
alternately.  
ENTER  
rtwe  
RETURN  
6
2
TITLE 99  
DVD-  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA AUTO  
4
CLEAR  
VIDEO  
ON SCREEN  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
To cancel the simulated surround effect  
Press ENTER to clear A3D-ONB from the screen.  
NOTES:  
Simulated Surround Effect works correctly only when playing  
back a title recorded in multichannels.  
Simulated Surround Effect does not affect the DVD VIDEO  
bitstream signal from the [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT] connectors.  
When Simulated Surround Effect is activated, the settings of  
AANALOG AUDIO OUTB and AD. RANGE CONTROLB are  
disabled. (A pg. 78)  
Simulated Surround Effect cannot be activated under the  
following conditions:  
When the HDD deck is in the recording mode.  
When the HDD or DVD deck is in the timer standby mode.  
When a disc containing both the Dolby Digital 5.1CH and 2CH  
sound formats is playing back a scene that is not in the 5.1CH  
sound format.  
Time Search  
You can play back a disc from the desired point by specifying the  
elapsed playing time from the beginning of a programme  
(DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD VIDEO and HDD) or a disc  
(Video CD/SVCD and Audio CD).  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select Aj9B, then press ENTER. The pop-up  
window appears under the selected item.  
TITLE 99  
CHAPTER 99  
EACH 0:00  
CINEMA AUTO  
Adjusting The Picture Quality  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
3 Press the number keys to enter the time, then press ENTER.  
Playback starts from the specified time.  
Example:  
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate  
picture mode.  
To play back from a point 12 (minutes): 50 (seconds) elapsed.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select A  
B, then press ENTER. The pop-up  
TIME  
TIME  
TIME  
window appears under the selected item.  
TITLE 99 CHAPTER 99 EACH 0:00  
CINEMA AUTO  
Press 2  
Press 0  
Press 1  
Press 5  
TIME  
TIME  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
3 Press F G to select the desired option, then press ENTER.  
If you have specified a wrong selection,  
Press RETURN on the remote control and repeat the above  
procedures from step 2.  
NORMAL:  
Normally select this option.  
CINEMA:  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Suitable for a movie disc, etc.  
SHARP:  
NOTES:  
Clearer, sharper-edged picture when viewing images with lots  
of flat, same-coloured surfaces such as cartoons.  
When A7B is displayed on the TV screen in step 3, you have  
selected a point that exceeds the recording time of the disc.  
Some DVD VIDEO discs do not contain time information, and it is  
not possible to use the Time Search function. In such cases, A7B  
is displayed on the TV screen as well.  
This function is not possible for a Video CD/SVCD with PBC  
function.  
SOFT:  
Select this option when too much noise appears.  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
32  
4 Press I. Playback starts in the programmed order.  
When all of the programmed tracks have been played back,  
Programme Playback stops, but the programmed information  
remains.  
Setting The Progressive Mode  
To add tracks to the end of the programme, perform steps 1  
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting whether the  
content on the disc is processed by field (video source) or by frame  
(film source).  
through 3.  
During Programme Playback, pressing T skips to the next  
selection of the programme. Pressing S returns to the  
beginning of the current selection.  
1 Set the unit to the progressive scan mode. (A pg. 89)  
2 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
To clear the on-screen bar and the contents of the programme  
Press ON SCREEN.  
3 Press D E to select A  
B, then press ENTER. The pop-up  
To cancel Programme Playback  
Press D E to select APRGMB, then press ENTER.  
window appears under the selected item.  
TITLE 99 CHAPTER 99 EACH 0:00  
3D-ON CINEMA  
NOTE:  
Programme Playback is not possible depending on the type of  
disc.  
AUTO  
DVD-  
VIDEO  
Random Playback  
4 Press F G to select the desired option, then press ENTER.  
AUTO:  
This mode automatically detects film and video content for  
progressive playback. When film content is found, flag  
detection is used to invoke playback of film data in full screen.  
When video content is found, pictures from multiple fields are  
used to detect sections with movement, and then this  
movement undergoes advanced image processing for output of  
sharp, detailed progressive images without any reduction in  
image quality where movement occurs. Normally, operation in  
this mode is recommended.  
You can play back all the tracks on the disc in random order.  
While stopped  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select ARNDB, then press ENTER. Playback starts  
in random order.  
TRACK 99  
EACH 0:00  
FILM:  
CINEMA  
Suitable for playing back a progressive scanned film source disc.  
VCD  
VIDEO:  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc. The outlines on  
the played back pictures will be soft.  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
To cancel Random Playback  
Perform steps 1 and 2.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
When the progressive mode is set, be sure to set AL-1 OUTPUTB to  
ACOMPONENTB (A pg. 72). Progressive scan is output only from  
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] connectors.  
The same track will not be played back more than once during  
Random Playback.  
Select The Switching Interval Of The Slide Show  
Programme Playback  
You can control the switching interval of the slide show.  
You can programme up to 30 tracks (Video CD/SVCD or Audio  
CD) to play back in the desired order.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
2 Press D E to select A  
B, then press ENTER. The pop-up  
While stopped  
window appears under the selected item.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice to access the on-screen bar.  
GROUP 99 TRACK 99  
2 Press D E to select APRGMB, then press ENTER. The  
programme table appears under on-screen bar.  
5 SEC.  
JPEG  
TRACK 99  
EACH 0:00  
CINEMA  
3 Press F G to select the desired option, then press ENTER.  
Each time you press F G, the interval changes as follows:  
5 SEC. Y 10 SEC. Y 15 SEC. Y 20 SEC. Y 25 SEC. Y  
30 SEC. Y (Back to the beginning)  
VCD  
3 Press the number keys to  
enter the track numbers in the  
desired order.  
USE [0-9] KEYS TO SELECT TRACK  
To clear the on-screen bar  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Examples:  
A To select track 5, press the  
number key A5B and ENTER.  
B To select track 15, press the  
number key A1B and A5B.  
NOTE:  
JPEG files are played back as a slide show. It may take more time  
to display an image with larger file size.  
Program Total Time  
C To select track 25, press the number key A2B and A5B.  
If you have specified a wrong selection  
Press CANCEL(L). The last selection is erased.  
Or press CLEAR (o). The whole selection is erased.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
33  
8 Press F G to select your country code, then press ENTER.  
If you do not need to change your country code, jump to 10.  
See ACountry/Area Code List for Parental LockB (A pg. 96).  
Parental Lock  
9 Press the number keys to enter the same password as in  
step 6 above, then press ENTER.  
10Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
This function restricts playback of DVD VIDEO discs which contain  
violent (and other) scenes according to the level set by the user.  
For example, if a movie which includes violent scenes supports the  
parental lock feature, such scenes which you do not want to let  
children view can be cut or replaced by other scenes.  
NOTE:  
Remember your password, or make a note of it.  
To Change The Settings  
You can change the Parental Lock settings later.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press DVD so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
1 Perform steps 1 to 3 of ATo Set Parental Lock For The First  
TimeB to access the APARENTAL LOCKB screen before  
continuing.  
To change the level  
CABLE/SAT  
3 Press F G to select the desired level, then press ENTER.  
To change the country code  
TV  
DVD  
DVD  
4 Press F G to select ACOUNTRY CODEB, then press ENTER.  
0-9  
5 Press F G to select your country code, then press ENTER.  
See ACountry/Area Code List for Parental LockB (A pg. 96).  
6 Press the number keys to enter the same password as in  
step 6 of ATo Set Parental Lock For The First TimeB, then press  
ENTER.  
ENTER  
FGDE  
7 Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
NOTE:  
If you forget your password, enter A8888B in step 6.  
To Temporarily Release Parental Lock  
When you set the Parental Lock level strictly, some discs may not  
be played back at all. When you insert such a disc and try to play it  
back, the confirmation screen appears on the TV screen, asking  
you whether you want Parental Lock to be temporarily released or  
not.  
SET UP  
1 Load a disc.  
If the disc is rated higher than the selected level, the  
confirmation screen appears.  
To Set Parental Lock For The First Time  
While stopped  
2 Press D E to select AYESB, then press ENTER.  
If you select ANOB, you cannot play back that disc.  
3 Press the number keys to enter the same password as in  
step 6 of ATo Set Parental Lock For The First TimeB, then press  
ENTER.  
When you enter the correct password, the Parental Lock is  
released and the unit starts playback.  
If you enter a wrong password, AENTRY ERRORB appears on  
the TV screen. Enter the correct password.  
1 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
2 Press D E to select ADVD VIDEO SET UPB, then press G.  
3 Press D E to select  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
APARENTAL LOCKB, then  
press G.  
LANGUAGE SET  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
PARENTAL LOCK DISC PLAY SET UP  
PARENTAL LEVEL  
COUNTRY CODE  
NONE  
US  
If you have successively entered wrong password three times,  
AENTRY ERROR CAN NOT CHANGE PASSWORDB appears  
on the TV screen. In such a case, press ENTER. The disc will  
stop. Then play back the disc again, and try the procedure  
again from step 1.  
SET UP  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SELECT  
4 Press F G to select  
APARENTAL LEVELB, then  
press ENTER.  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
NOTE:  
LANGUAGE SET  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
PARENTAL LOCK DISC PLAY SET UP  
If you forget your password, enter A8888B in step 3.  
PARENTAL LEVEL  
COUNTRY CODE  
NONE  
US  
5 Press F G to select the  
desired level, then press  
ENTER.  
The smaller the value of level  
is, the more restrictive the  
Parental Lock level becomes.  
SET UP  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SELECT  
Select ANONEB to cancel the restriction.  
6 Press the number keys to enter your desired four-digit number,  
then press ENTER.  
If you made a mistake, enter a correct number again.  
7 Press F G to select ACOUNTRY CODEB, then press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
34  
7 Press o twice to stop recording.  
It takes about 10 seconds to end the writing session when you  
stop recording.  
Basic Recording  
NOTES:  
It is recommended to format a DVD-RAM disc before use if you  
use the disc on this unit for the first time.  
When using a brand-new DVD-RW disc, format the disc either in  
VR mode or in Video mode. (A pg. 87)  
Recordings made on DVD-R/RW disc must be finalised to play  
back on other DVD players. Perform AFinalise A Disc (DVD Deck  
Only)B (A pg. 88).  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
You can record up to 99 programmes and 999 play lists on each  
disc.  
Some programmes can only be recorded one time.  
When recording is started, an index of the first part of recording is  
automatically recorded. (A pg. 57) To record satellite  
programmes, refer to page 53. To delete the index, refer to  
page 59.  
ATTENTION:  
It is not possible to record programmes on a DVD-R disc which  
has already been finalised.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
4 9  
Recording sometimes may stop or cannot be performed even if  
there is enough available capacity remaining on the disc.  
It is not possible to record on both DVD and HDD simultaneously.  
Recording Mode  
MPEG2 format is used as recording format. As a guide for picture  
quality, the AbpsB unit is used to represent how much data can be  
recorded per second. The larger this value is, the better the picture  
quality becomes but more capacity is required for the recording.  
Select XP or SP for programmes where quick movement occurs,  
such as sports programmes, and LP or EP for talk shows, etc. with  
relatively less movement.  
7
8
PR +/  
REC  
MODE  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
DVD  
The recording modes for a 4.7 GB disc are set as follows:  
0-9  
Recording  
mode  
Recording amount  
(approx.)  
Maximum recording  
time (approx.)  
PR+/  
-
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
10 Mbps  
5 Mbps  
1 hour  
2 hours  
ENTER  
2.5 Mbps  
1.6 Mbps  
4 hours  
6 hours  
4
FR60-FR360  
(A pg. 36)  
The amount varies  
depending on the  
selected time.  
1 – 6 hours  
7
8
9
FR420  
FR480  
7 hours  
8 hours  
REC MODE  
For details on FR mode, refer to  
A
Free Rate Function  
B
(
A
pg. 36).  
1 Load a recordable disc.  
For details, refer to APlacing A DiscB (A pg. 8).  
2 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or DVD  
on the remote so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 Press PR +/– or the number keys to select the channel you  
wish to record.  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode,  
then press ENTER.  
Each time you press REC MODE, the recording mode changes  
as follows:  
XP N SP N LP NEP N FR60-FR360* N FR420, FR480 N  
(Back to the beginning)  
* The value is selectable from 1 to 6 hours in 5-minutes interval by  
pressing D E repeatedly after selecting AFR60-FR360B. To change the  
value in 30-minutes interval, press and hold D E.  
For details on the recording mode, see the right column.  
5 Press R on the unit to start recording. Or while holding R, press  
I on the remote control.  
The DVD recording lamp lights up on the unit.  
6 Press R and W on the remote control simultaneously to pause  
recording.  
To resume recording, press R and I simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
35  
Instant Timer Recording (ITR)  
This easy method lets you record for from 30 minutes to 6 hours  
(selectable in 30-minutes interval), and shuts the unit off after  
recording is finished.  
Recording Features  
1 Press R on the unit to start recording.  
2 Press R again to engage the ITR mode.  
Turn on the unit.  
On the front display panel, A0:30B appears.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or DVD  
on the remote so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 If you want to record for more than 30 minutes, press R to  
minutes.  
NOTES:  
You can only perform ITR using the R button on the unit.  
When the recording capacity becomes full during timer recording  
or Instant Timer Recording, the unit automatically performs  
ARelief RecordingB (A pg. 51).  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
Watch Another Programme While Recording On The  
Unit  
While recording is going on, you can watch another programme on  
the TV by using the TV’s tuner.  
7
DISPLAY  
CABLE/SAT  
NOTE:  
TV  
DVD  
TV AV / VIDEO  
It is required that the remote control is set to be able to operate the  
TV in advance. (A pg. 74)  
DVD  
1 During recording, press TV AV/VIDEO to select TV mode.  
Video mode is disengaged, and the VIDEO indicator on the  
front display panel lights off .  
PR+/  
-
VIDEO indicator lights off.  
The programme received on the TV’s tuner is displayed on the  
TV screen.  
2 Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to TV.  
3 Press PR +/– repeatedly to select the desired channel.  
REMAIN  
NOTE:  
DISPLAY  
If a decoder is connected to the unit (A pg. 77), you can select a  
scrambled channel as well as other normal channels.  
Elapsed Recording Time And Disc Remaining Time  
Indication  
During recording, press DISPLAY repeatedly until the desired  
indication appears on the front display panel.  
Each time you press DISPLAY, the time indication changes as  
follows:  
Elapsed recording time N Disc remaining time N Clock N (Back  
to the beginning)  
You can also check the disc remaining time by pressing REMAIN  
while the unit is stopped or recording is in progress. The list of  
disc remaining times for all recording modes appears on the TV  
screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BASIC OPERATIONS ON DVD DECK  
EN  
36  
Free Rate Function  
Receiving Stereo And Bilingual Programmes  
Your unit is equipped with a Sound-Multiplex decoder (A2) and a  
Digital stereo sound decoder (NICAM) making reception of stereo  
and bilingual broadcasts possible.  
When the channel is changed, the type of broadcast being  
received will be displayed on the TV screen for a few seconds.  
To record the entire programme, the unit automatically sets the  
appropriate recording mode depending on the combination of the  
total time of the programme to be recorded and either the  
remaining disc space or the specified recording time (from 60  
minutes to 480 minutes).  
8 To record the entire programme within the actual  
remaining disc space (DVD deck only)  
Type of Broadcast Being  
On-Screen Display  
Received  
Select AFR (JUST)B in a recording mode selection procedure.  
Note that this function is available only for timer programming  
recording (A pg. 49, 51) and dubbing from HDD to DVD  
(A pg. 64).  
A2 Stereo  
A2 Bilingual  
Regular Monaural  
NICAM Stereo  
NICAM Bilingual  
NICAM Monaural  
8 To record the entire programme by specifying the desired  
recording time  
Select AFR60-FR360B, AFR420B or AFR480B in a recording mode  
selection procedure. (A pg. 34, 37, 49, 51)  
NOTES:  
ASUPERIMPOSEB must be set to AAUTOB. Otherwise the on-  
screen displays will not appear. (A pg. 80)  
If the quality of stereo sound being received is poor, the  
broadcast might be received in monaural with better quality.  
8 To record a 25-min. long daily programme five times just  
on the same DVD disc for example  
Perform Ac Timer ProgrammingB (A pg. 49) procedure. Be  
sure to set the recording mode to AFR125B and set Weekly/Daily  
Rec Function to AMON-FRIB in step 8 to fit the total recording time  
to the whole disc space.  
Selection Of The Audio Channel To Be Recorded On A  
Disc  
When a programme is recorded on a DVD-RAM or DVD-RW disc  
in VR mode, all audio channels of the receiving programme are  
recorded on the disc. When you record a programme on a DVD-R  
or DVD-RW disc in video mode, select the desired audio channel  
(ANICAMB or AMONOB) to be recorded on the disc. (A pg. 79)  
A: 1st  
B: 2nd  
Blank  
C: 3rd  
D: 4th  
E: 5th  
NOTE:  
Before playing back a programme recorded in stereo, or a bilingual  
programme, refer to AAudio Channel SelectionB (A pg. 28).  
When the same programme is recorded in SP mode instead of in  
AFR125B, the 5th programme cannot be recorded.  
A: 1st  
B: 2nd  
C: 3rd  
Blank  
D: 4th  
E: Blank (20 min.)  
NOTES:  
You can programme this unit to timer-record, regardless of the  
disc remaining time. When the disc remaining time is not enough,  
the unit performs ARelief RecordingB (A pg. 51). To avoid this,  
make sure of the disc remaining time before setting timer  
programming.  
(Example) If you programmed to timer-record for 60 minutes in  
SP mode on a 120-minute disc, the disc remaining time would be  
30 minutes in XP mode, 60 minutes in SP mode, 120 minutes in  
LP mode, 180 minutes in EP mode, and 240 minutes in FR480  
mode. Timer-recording will not complete beyond these remaining  
times.  
The maximum recording time of FR (JUST) mode is the same as  
the recording time of FR480 mode. When timer programming a  
long programme in FR (JUST) mode on a disc whose remaining  
time is short, it is recommended to check the disc remaining time  
in FR480 mode to see if the remaining time is enough for the  
programme.  
Even if more than one programme are timer programmed in FR  
(JUST) mode, only the first one is recorded.  
In order to ensure that the recording fits on the disc, this feature  
may leave a slight non-recorded section at the end of the disc.  
There may be some noise and sound disturbance at the point on  
the disc where the unit switches the mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BASIC OPERATIONS ON HDD DECK  
EN  
37  
Pause recording on HDD deck  
Basic Recording  
It is not possible to pause recording. Pressing W initiates Live  
Memory Playback.  
However, it is still possible to pause recording only when recording  
the channels of external sources (AL-1B, AL-2B, AF-1B, and ADVB).  
While holding R, press W on the remote. To resume recording,  
while holding R, press I on the remote.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
No operation can be made with the buttons on the unit.  
ATTENTION:  
Recording Mode  
The HDD on the unit requires approximately 20 seconds to start  
up after the unit has been turned on, during which no operation  
can be made.  
MPEG2 format is used as recording format. As a guide for picture  
quality, the AbpsB unit is used to represent how much data can be  
recorded per second. The larger this value is, the better the picture  
quality becomes but more capacity is required for the recording.  
Select XP or SP for programmes where quick movement occurs,  
such as sports programmes, and LP or EP for talk shows, etc. with  
relatively less movement.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
HDD lamp  
SELECT  
Recording mode  
Maximum recording time (approx.)  
XP  
SP  
34 hours  
69 hours  
7
8
PR +/  
LP  
138 hours  
209 hours  
300 hours  
CABLE/SAT  
EP  
TV  
DVD  
FR480  
HDD  
0-9  
For details on FR mode, refer to  
A
Free Rate Function  
B
(
A
pg. 36).  
NOTE:  
The maximum recording time stated in the above table are the  
approximate time under unused condition.  
PR+/  
-
4
8
7
9
REC MODE  
1 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or HDD  
on the remote so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
2 Press PR +/– or the number keys to select the channel you  
wish to record.  
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode,  
then press ENTER.  
Each time you press REC MODE, the recording mode changes  
as follows:  
XP N SP N LP NEP N FR60-FR360* N FR420, FR480 N  
(Back to the beginning)  
* The value is selectable from 1 to 6 hours in 5 minutes interval by  
pressing D E repeatedly after selecting AFR60-FR360B. To change the  
value in 30 minutes interval, press and hold D E.  
For details on the recording mode, see the right column.  
4 Press R on the unit to start recording. Or while holding R, press  
I on the remote control.  
The HDD recording lamp lights up on the unit.  
5 Press o twice to stop recording.  
Pressing o once displays the confirmation message to stop  
recording. Press o again to terminate recording.  
NOTES:  
Continuous recording for over 48 hours is not possible.  
It is not possible to record on both DVD and HDD simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
BASIC OPERATIONS ON HDD DECK  
EN  
38  
Watch Another Programme While Recording On The Unit  
While recording is going on, you can watch another programme on  
the TV by using the TV’s tuner.  
Recording Features  
Turn on the unit.  
NOTE:  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or HDD  
on the remote so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
It is required that the remote control is set to be able to operate the  
TV in advance. (A pg. 74)  
1 During recording, press TV AV/VIDEO to select TV mode.  
Video mode is disengaged, and the VIDEO indicator on the  
front display panel lights off.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
VIDEO indicator lights off.  
HDD lamp  
SELECT  
The programme received on the TV’s tuner is displayed on the  
TV screen.  
7
PR +/  
DISPLAY  
2 Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to TV.  
CABLE/SAT  
3 Press PR +/– repeatedly to select the desired channel.  
TV  
DVD  
TV AV / VIDEO  
NOTE:  
HDD  
If a decoder is connected to the unit (A pg. 77), you can select a  
scrambled channel as well as other normal channels.  
Elapsed Recording Time And Disc Remaining Time  
Indication  
PR+/-  
During recording, press DISPLAY repeatedly until the desired  
indication appears on the front display panel.  
Each time you press DISPLAY, the time indication changes as  
follows:  
Elapsed recording time N Disc remaining time N Clock N (Back  
to the beginning)  
You can also check the disc remaining time by pressing REMAIN  
while the unit is stopped or recording is in progress. The list of  
disc remaining times for all recording modes appears on the TV  
screen.  
REMAIN  
DISPLAY  
Receiving Stereo And Bilingual Programmes  
Your unit is equipped with a Sound-Multiplex decoder (A2) and a  
Digital stereo sound decoder (NICAM) making reception of stereo  
and bilingual broadcasts possible.  
When the channel is changed, the type of broadcast being  
received will be displayed on the TV screen for a few seconds.  
Instant Timer Recording (ITR)  
This easy method lets you record for from 30 minutes to 6 hours  
(selectable in 30-minutes interval), and shuts the unit off after  
recording is finished.  
Type of Broadcast Being  
On-Screen Display  
Received  
A2 Stereo  
A2 Bilingual  
Regular Monaural  
NICAM Stereo  
NICAM Bilingual  
NICAM Monaural  
1 Press R on the unit to start recording.  
2 Press R again to engage the ITR mode.  
On the front display panel, A0:30B appears.  
3 If you want to record for more than 30 minutes, press R to  
extend the time. Each press extends recording time by 30  
minutes.  
NOTES:  
ASUPERIMPOSEB must be set to AAUTOB. Otherwise the on-  
screen displays will not appear. (A pg. 80)  
If the quality of stereo sound being received is poor, the  
broadcast might be received in monaural with better quality.  
NOTES:  
You can only perform ITR using the R button on the unit.  
When the recording capacity becomes full during timer recording  
or Instant Timer Recording, the unit is automatically shut off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BASIC OPERATIONS ON HDD DECK  
EN  
39  
Basic Playback  
Playback Features  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press HDD so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
4
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
HDD  
8
9
CABLE/SAT  
MARK  
TV  
DVD  
HDD  
4
S
T
3/SLOW  
-
5/SLOW +  
9
o
-
JUMP  
JUMP +  
ENTER  
ON SCREEN  
4
8
9
Variable Speed Search  
During playback, press N for forward variable speed search, or  
O for reverse variable speed search.  
Each press of the button increases the search speed for each  
direction.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
N
Forward  
Reverse  
O
ATTENTION:  
It may take a few seconds to start playback. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Reverse  
Slow Motion  
3 steps  
Reverse Search Reverse  
Normal  
Play  
Slow Motion  
3 steps  
Forward Search  
5 steps  
4 steps  
Play  
Forward/reverse high-speed search and other operations  
cannot be performed while playback is stopped.  
1
116  
-
-
-
60  
15  
-60 -15 -5 -3  
-1  
1
1.5  
3
5
½
½ ¼  
¼
16  
1 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or HDD  
NOTE:  
on the remote so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
You can hear the (normal) audio track only during 1.5x speed  
search.  
2 Press I to start playback.  
The Library Database Navigation also enables you to search  
and select the desired programmes. (A pg. 58)  
Still Picture/Frame-By-Frame Playback  
1 Press W to pause during playback.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
2 Press SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) to activate frame-by-  
4 Press o to stop playback.  
frame playback.  
NOTE:  
Each press of SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) advances/  
reverses the still picture frame by frame.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
When the Library Database Navigation screen appears, choose a  
thumbnail image of the desired title on the TV screen, then press  
ENTER. (A pg. 58)  
Slow Motion  
1 Press W to pause during playback.  
2 Press SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) for 2 or more seconds.  
Each press of SLOW – (O) or SLOW + (N) increases the  
slow motion speed for each direction.  
Skip Search  
During playback, press v.  
Each press initiates an approximately 30-second period of fast-  
motion playback. Normal playback resumes automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
BASIC OPERATIONS ON HDD DECK  
EN  
40  
One Touch Replay  
Marking Positions To Play Back Again Later  
It is possible to mark positions (up to 999 points) where you want  
to play back once again later, and start playback from a marked  
position. Marking onto the disc when recording is helpful to locate  
a start point when you play back the disc later.  
You can move back the playback position slightly.  
Press w.  
Each press skips back for approximately 7 seconds and resumes  
playback.  
Pressing while paused skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
and resumes pause.  
To mark positions:  
During playback, press MARK at  
positions you want to mark.  
AMARKB appears on the TV screen.  
You can easily locate the marked  
positions using S or T when  
you play back the disc.  
1.5x Speed Search  
You can play back a title quickly during playback or Live Memory  
Playback (A pg. 46).  
1.5x speed search cannot be performed during recording on HDD  
or DVD.  
To delete the marked positions:  
While paused, press S or T to  
locate a marked position you want to  
delete, then press MARK.  
Crossed AMARKB appears on the  
TV screen, and the marked position  
is deleted.  
1 Press O to locate the point to start 1.5x speed search from.  
2 Press I to resume playback.  
3 Press N once.  
Pressing ON SCREEN displays A+X1.5B on the top right corner of  
the screen.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
When the unit is connected with a digital audio device using an  
optional optical cable, set ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB to APCM ONLYB.  
(A pg. 28)  
When a monaural programme changes to a stereo programme  
while recording, a mark signal is automatically recorded.  
Jump Search  
You can locate a scene ahead or behind the current one by  
jumping scenes according to selected time intervals (A pg. 79)  
during playback (or Live Memory Playback).  
Press JUMP – or JUMP +.  
To advance forward or back, press JUMP – or JUMP +  
repeatedly within 5 seconds of each press to continue jump.  
Depending on the time from where you want to start jump search,  
the first press of JUMP – or JUMP + will not necessarily lead to a  
jump of the selected time interval. The first press will lead to a  
jump to the nearest quarter points of an hour (15 min/ 30 min/ 45  
min/ 00 min). The subsequent jumps will then be in accordance  
to the selected time interval.  
When you cannot advance any further (beginning or end of  
programme reached), the message AUNABLE TO GO BACK  
ANY MOREB appears on the screen and the on-air screen  
resumes. In such a case, press S, O or o.  
Example:  
Playback search when jump interval is set to 15 MIN jumps.  
Taking for instance, you want to start jump search 40 minutes after  
the beginning of the programme. Pressing JUMP – or JUMP + will  
result a jump to the scene at the 30 minutes point or 45 minutes point  
respectively as illustrated below. At the subsequent press, the scene  
will jump to the 15 minutes point or 1 hour point respectively,  
according to the selected time interval, which in this case is  
A15 MINB.  
Time counter  
0 min  
40 min  
45 min  
1 h 15 min  
15 min  
30 min  
1 h  
Beginning of programme  
Current scene  
End of programme  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
BASIC OPERATIONS ON VHS DECK  
EN  
41  
1 Load a cassette. Make sure the window side is up, the rear  
label side is facing you and the arrow on the front of the  
cassette is pointed toward the unit.  
Do not apply too much pressure when inserting.  
If the record safety tab has been removed, playback begins  
automatically. However, when APOWER SAVEB is set to AONB  
(A pg. 80), playback will not begin automatically even though a  
cassette with its record safety tab intact is inserted.  
The unit’s power comes on automatically and the counter is  
reset to 0:00:00.  
Basic Playback  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
4
5
2 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or VHS  
on the remote so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 Find the programme start point. If the tape is advanced past the  
start point, press O. To go forward, press N.  
4 Press I to start playback.  
ABESTB appears and blinks on the front display panel during  
automatic tracking. (A pg. 45)  
3
8
x
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
5 Press o to stop playback.  
To eject the cassette, press M (VHS).  
VHS  
Clean the video heads using a dry cleaning cassette -  
TCL-2 - when:  
Rough, poor picture appears while a tape is played back.  
The picture is unclear or no picture appears.  
AUSE CLEANING CASSETTEB appears on the screen (only  
with AO.S.D.B set to AAUTOB). (A pg. 81)  
NOTE:  
The heads get dirty in the following cases:  
in an environment prone to extreme temperature or humidity  
in a dusty environment  
flaw, dirt or mould on video tapes  
continuous usage for a long time  
4
3
8
5
Usable cassettes  
Full-Size VHS  
T-30 (ST-30**)  
T-60 (ST-60**)  
T-90  
T-120 (ST-120**)  
T-160 (ST-160**)  
ST-210**  
Compact VHS*  
TC-20 (ST-C20**)  
TC-30 (ST-C30**)  
TC-40 (ST-C40**)  
* Compact VHS camcorder recordings can be played on this unit. Simply  
place the recorded cassette into a VHS Cassette Adapter and it can be  
used just like any full-sized VHS cassette.  
**This unit can record on regular VHS and Super VHS cassettes.  
However, it will record regular VHS signals only.  
S-VHS recording is not possible with this unit.  
This unit is equipped with SQPB (S-VHS QUASI PLAYBACK)  
that lets you watch tapes recorded in the S-VHS format and the  
SP mode with regular VHS resolution.  
SQPB does not deliver Super VHS resolution.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BASIC OPERATIONS ON VHS DECK  
EN  
42  
Variable Speed Search  
During playback, press N for forward variable speed search, or  
O for reverse variable speed search.  
Each press of the button increases the search speed for each  
direction.  
When pressing N:  
(SP, LP): +5x Y +7x  
When pressing O:  
Playback Features  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or VHS  
on the remote so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
Once O is pressed, reverse search starts in –1x normal  
playback speed. After this process, each press of O changes  
the search speed between –5x and –7x in both SP mode and LP  
mode.  
(SP, LP): –1x N –5x Y –7x  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
HDD  
VHS  
DVD  
One Touch Replay  
During playback (or Live Memory Playback), press  
PR+/-  
w. The unit  
rewinds the picture a little (about 7 seconds) and resumes playback.  
If the button is pressed repeatedly, the unit rewinds the pictures  
continuously and resumes playback.  
Skip Search  
During playback, press  
sections.  
Each press initiates an approximately 30-second period of fast-  
motion playback. Normal playback resumes automatically.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
6
2
3
v
1 to 6 times to skip over unwanted  
4
5
9
8
Index Search  
Your unit automatically marks index codes at the beginning of each  
recording. This function gives you quick access to any one of the 9  
index codes in either direction.  
AUDIO  
PROGRESSIVE  
SCAN  
NOTE:  
Before starting, make sure the unit is in the Stop mode.  
Press S or T to activate Index Search. AS 1B or AT 1B is  
displayed on the TV screen and search begins in the  
corresponding direction.  
ATTENTION:  
In the search, still, slow-motion or frame-by-frame playback  
mode,  
To access index codes 2 through 9, press S or T repeatedly  
until the correct index number is displayed.  
Example:  
To locate the beginning of B from the current position, press S  
twice.  
the picture will be distorted.  
the noise bars will appear.  
there may be a loss of colour.  
you cannot hear the sound.  
To locate the beginning of D from the current position, press T  
once.  
Still Picture/Frame-By-Frame Playback  
1 Press W to pause during playback.  
Current position  
If there is vertical jitter, press PR +/– to correct the picture.  
2 Press W to activate frame-by-frame playback.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
Slow Motion  
1 Press W to pause during playback.  
Index number  
2 Press and hold W for 2 seconds, then release. Press W and  
release again to return to still picture.  
Press N for forward slow motion or O for reverse slow  
motion.  
When the specified index code is located, playback begins  
automatically.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
NOTE:  
During slow motion playback, some noise may appear on the TV  
screen. Press PR +/– to eliminate the noises.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
BASIC OPERATIONS ON VHS DECK  
EN  
43  
Next Function Memory  
Soundtrack Selection  
Your unit is capable of recording three soundtracks (HI-FI L,  
HI-FI R and NORM) and will play back the one you select.  
The Next Function Memory  
A
tells  
B
the unit what to do after rewinding.  
Before continuing, make sure the unit is in the Stop mode.  
For Automatic Start Of Playback  
Press O, then press I within 2 seconds.  
During Playback  
Pressing AUDIO changes the soundtrack as follows:  
TRACK  
Repeat Playback  
Your unit can automatically play back the whole tape 100 times  
repeatedly.  
USE  
On-Screen Display  
HI-FI  
For HI-FI stereo tapes  
L W X R  
1 Press I to start playback.  
HI-FI  
L W  
For main audio of Bilingual tapes  
2 Press and hold I for over 5 seconds, then release.  
AxB lights up on the front display panel.  
After playing back a tape 100 times, the unit stops  
automatically.  
HI-FI  
For sub audio of Bilingual tapes  
X R  
3 Press o at any time to stop Repeat Playback.  
NORM  
For audio-dubbed tapes  
For audio-dubbed tapes  
Pressing I, O, N or W also stops Repeat Playback.  
HI-FI  
NORM  
Manual Tracking  
Your unit is equipped with automatic tracking control. During  
playback, you can override this and adjust the tracking manually by  
pressing the PR buttons.  
NOTES:  
AHI-FI L W X RB should normally be selected. In this mode, Hi-Fi  
track is played back automatically for tapes with only normal  
audio.  
For instructions on recording stereo and bilingual programmes,  
refer to page 45.  
AO.S.D.B must be set to AAUTOB or the on-screen displays will not  
appear. (A pg. 81)  
1 During playback, press PR +/– on the unit simultaneously to  
activate manual tracking.  
VHS Progressive Scan  
You can watch the images on VHS deck in the Progressive scan  
mode via component video.  
2 Press PR +/– to adjust the tracking manually.  
To return to automatic tracking, press PR +/– simultaneously or  
eject and insert the tape again.  
ATTENTION:  
NOTE:  
Your TV needs to be compatible with Progressive and to have  
Component video input connectors.  
When a new tape is inserted, the unit enters the automatic tracking  
mode automatically.  
1 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
the unit.  
2 Set AL-1 OUTPUTB to ACOMPONENTB (A pg. 72), and the  
Progressive-compatible TV to its component input mode.  
3 Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN for 3 or more seconds.  
The video output indicator q lights up on the front display  
panel.  
4 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit, then  
press PROGRESSIVE SCAN.  
ACOMP OFFB is displayed on the front display panel. It will be  
displayed for 5 seconds.  
5 Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN again within 5 seconds.  
ACOMP ONB is displayed on the front display panel and q  
lights up on the front display panel.  
The VHS progressive scan image will then be outputted from  
the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR)] connectors.  
NOTES:  
Be sure to engage the HDD or DVD deck in stop mode.  
It is possible to watch in interlace mode through the component  
video connection (AL-1 OUTPUTB set to ACOMPONENTB) simply  
by pressing PROGRESSIVE SCAN to switch to ACOMP ONB.  
However, q will not light up on the front display panel as the  
image outputted is not in progressive mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
BASIC OPERATIONS ON VHS DECK  
EN  
44  
Basic Recording  
Recording Features  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or VHS  
on the remote so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
4 9  
7
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
7
8
PR +/  
VHS  
REC  
MODE  
CABLE/SAT  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
TV AV/VIDEO  
VHS  
TV  
DVD  
0-9  
PR+/-  
PR+/-  
4
9
7
8
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
REC MODE  
Watch Another Programme While Recording On The Unit  
While recording is going on, you can watch another programme on  
the TV by using the TV’s tuner.  
1 Load a cassette with the record safety tab intact.  
The unit’s power comes on automatically and the counter is  
reset to 0:00:00.  
NOTE:  
2 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or VHS  
It is required that the remote control is set to be able to operate the  
on the remote so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
TV in advance. (A pg. 74)  
3 Press PR +/– or the number keys to select the channel you  
1 During recording, press TV AV/VIDEO to select TV mode.  
Video mode is disengaged, and the VIDEO indicator on the  
front display panel lights off.  
wish to record.  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to set the recording mode.  
5 Press R on the unit to start recording. Or while holding R, press  
VIDEO indicator lights off.  
I on the remote control.  
The VHS recording lamp lights up on the unit.  
If AO.S.D.B is set to AAUTOB (A pg. 81), AMARKB blinks on the  
screen while an index code is being marked.  
B.E.S.T. takes place at the beginning of both the first SP and the  
first LP recording after inserting the cassette. (A pg. 45)  
The programme received on the TV’s tuner is displayed on the  
TV screen.  
6 Press W to pause recording.  
2 Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to TV.  
You can select channel during the Record Pause mode.  
To resume recording, press I.  
3 Press PR +/– repeatedly to select the desired channel.  
7 Press o to stop recording.  
Elapsed Recording Time Indication  
The VHS recording lamp lights off on the unit.  
1 Press DISPLAY until a counter reading appears on the front  
display panel.  
2 Press CANCEL to reset the counter before starting recording or  
playback.  
The counter is reset to A0:00:00B and shows the exact elapsed  
time as the tape runs. You can check the exact time of a  
recording or playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
BASIC OPERATIONS ON VHS DECK  
EN  
45  
To Record Stereo and Bilingual Programmes (A2)  
Instant Timer Recording (ITR)  
This easy method lets you record for from 30 minutes to 6 hours  
(selectable in 30-minutes interval), and shuts the unit off after  
recording is finished.  
Stereo programmes are automatically recorded in stereo on the Hi-  
Fi audio track (with the normal audio track recording mixed L and R  
channel sound).  
Bilingual programmes are automatically recorded in bilingual on  
the Hi-Fi audio track. The main soundtrack will be recorded on  
the normal audio track.  
1 Press R on the unit to start recording.  
2 Press R again to engage the ITR mode.  
To Record NICAM Stereo and Bilingual Programmes  
The NICAM audio programme will be recorded on the Hi-Fi audio  
track, and the standard audio programme will be recorded on the  
normal audio track.  
On the front display panel, A0:30B appears.  
3 If you want to record for more than 30 minutes, press R to  
extend the time. Each press extends recording time by 30  
minutes.  
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
If the quality of stereo sound being received is poor, the  
broadcast will be received in monaural with better quality.  
Before playing back a programme recorded in stereo, or a  
bilingual programme, refer to ASoundtrack SelectionB (A pg. 43).  
You can only perform ITR using the R button on the unit.  
During Instant Timer Recording, any other timer programmed  
recording won’t start even if their start time has come. In such a  
case, the timer programmed recording starts (if the end time of  
the timer programmed recording is set after the end of Instant  
Timer Recording) after the Instant Timer Recording finishes.  
B.E.S.T. Picture System  
The B.E.S.T. (Biconditional Equalised Signal Tracking) system  
checks the condition of the tape in use during playback and  
recording, and compensates to provide the highest-possible  
playback and recording pictures. You can set AB.E.S.T.B to AONB or  
AOFFB to your preference. (A pg. 81)  
Tape Remaining Time  
1 Press DISPLAY until the time remaining on the tape appears.  
By pressing the DISPLAY button, you can change the display  
to show the clock time, counter reading or tape remaining time.  
Playback  
NOTES:  
The unit assesses the quality of the tape once you initiate  
playback.  
When you press DISPLAY, the on-screen display appears on the  
TV screen for 5 seconds, then the displays other than the counter  
disappears. To clear the counter display, press DISPLAY.  
Depending on the type of tape being used, the tape remaining  
time reading may not appear right away, or is not correct.  
A– –:– –B may sometimes appear, or the display may blink on  
occasion.  
The unit adjusts the playback picture quality based on the quality  
of the tape in use.  
B.E.S.T. is active during automatic tracking. ABESTB appears and  
blinks on the front display panel.  
ABESTB only appears at the beginning of automatic tracking.  
Even though it doesn’t appear after that, the B.E.S.T. function is  
still operative.  
Receiving Stereo And Bilingual Programmes  
Your unit is equipped with a Sound-Multiplex decoder (A2) and a  
Digital stereo sound decoder (NICAM) making reception of stereo  
and bilingual broadcasts possible.  
When the channel is changed, the type of broadcast being  
received will be displayed on the TV screen for a few seconds.  
Recording  
The unit assesses the quality of the tape once you initiate  
recording.  
The unit spends approximately 7 seconds assessing the  
condition of the tape, then begins recording.  
ATTENTION:  
Since the B.E.S.T. system works before recording actually starts,  
there is a delay of approximately 7 seconds after R and I on the  
remote control are pressed, or R on the unit is pressed. To make  
sure you record the desired scene or programme in its entirety,  
first perform the following steps:  
A While holding W, press R to engage the Record Pause mode.  
The unit then automatically checks the condition of the tape  
and, after approximately 7 seconds, re-enters Record Pause  
mode.  
Type of Broadcast Being Received  
A2 Stereo  
On-Screen Display  
ST  
A2 Bilingual  
BIL.  
Regular Monaural  
NICAM Stereo  
(none)  
ST NICAM  
BIL. NICAM  
NICAM  
NICAM Bilingual  
NICAM Monaural  
B Press I to start recording.  
If you want to bypass the B.E.S.T. system and begin recording  
immediately, set AB.E.S.T.B to AOFFB. (A pg. 81)  
To listen to a stereo programme, press AUDIO until AHI-FI L W  
X RB appears on the TV screen.  
To listen to a bilingual programme, press AUDIO until AHI-FI L WB  
Accidental erasure prevention  
To prevent accidental recording on  
a recorded cassette, remove its  
safety tab. To record on it later,  
cover the hole with adhesive tape.  
To listen to the standard (Regular Monaural) audio while  
receiving a NICAM broadcast, press AUDIO until ANORMB  
appears on the TV screen.  
NOTE:  
AO.S.D.B must be set to AAUTOB, or the on-screen displays will not  
appear. (A pg. 81)  
Record safety tab  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
LIVE MEMORY PLAYBACK ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
46  
Recording/playback Status Display  
Live Memory Playback  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press DV/HDD/DVD on the unit repeatedly to select the HDD  
or DVD deck.  
LIVE  
NAVIGATION  
This unit records pictures onto the hard disc and DVD-RAM disc  
instead of video tapes, then plays back the pictures recorded on  
the disc. This makes it possible to achieve high-speed writing and  
read-out that has not been possible with conventional VCRs,  
enabling recording and playback simultaneously.  
Press NAVIGATION to display Library Database  
Navigation menu, then choose a programme to play  
back. (A pg. 57)  
8
High-speed spin  
Recording  
(High-speed writing)  
Playback  
(High-speed read-out)  
ON SCREEN  
Live Memory Playback status can be checked by  
pressing ON SCREEN to display the bar meter on  
the superimpose display. The current status is  
superimposed on the TV screen. (A pg. 14, AWhen  
using Live Memory playbackB)  
It is called ALive Memory PlaybackB to start playback of the  
programme being recorded, with a time-lag between a recording  
point and a playback point, as shown in the figure below.  
NOTES:  
Current playback point  
(Live Memory Playback)  
Live Memory Playback could be performed approximately 30  
seconds after recording has started on the DVD-RAM disc.  
However, for HDD, Live Memory Playback is possible right after  
recording has started.  
Current recording position  
Recording start point  
(Recording point)  
Although high-speed search up to approximately 30 seconds  
before the current recording point is possible during Live Memory  
Playback, once the current recording point is reached, the unit  
resumes normal playback and maintains a delay of  
approximately 30 seconds so that recording and playback can  
continue.  
Playback  
continues  
Recording  
continues  
1 hour  
0
30 min.  
Currently elapsed recording time  
When using Live Memory Playback during timer recording,  
playback continues even after the end of the recording.  
When using Live Memory Playback during timer recording,  
playback is automatically stopped just before recording starts,  
and then recording starts when the time arrives for the next timer-  
programme.  
Not only can this unit play back a programme previously recorded  
while recording or timer recording another programme, but the unit  
also allows you to play back from the beginning of a programme  
while continuing to record the same programme.  
It is impossible to perform ITR even if you press R during Live  
Memory Playback. (A pg. 38)  
Press o to display the programme being recorded, then perform  
ITR settings.  
Playback may be paused for a moment during Live Memory  
Playback, which does not interfere with recording.  
Live Memory Playback cannot be performed while recording the  
source from DV input. (A pg. 68, ADV Dubbing (HDD & DVD  
Deck Only)B)  
When LIVE CHECK is pressed to display the picture currently  
being recorded, the picture size may not be correct.  
Press R or LIVE to stop Live Memory Playback.  
Live Memory Playback cannot be performed even if the ALIVE  
MEMORYB in AHDD SET UPB is set to other than AOFFB, as  
temporary recording on HDD stops during recording on DVD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
LIVE MEMORY PLAYBACK ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
47  
F N  
Buttons To Be Used During Live Memory Playback  
Each press of the button during playback advances the  
playback speed in 4 steps in the forward direction.  
Available only when paused  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press HDD or DVD to select the desired deck for Live Memory  
Playback.  
Each press of the button advances the still picture frame by  
frame.  
Pressing down for 2 or more seconds advances playback at 1/  
16 times the normal speed. Then, each press of the button  
advances slow-motion at 1/16 times, 1/4 times and 1/2 times  
the normal playback.  
CABLE/SAT  
G o  
TV  
DVD  
Pressing once during Live Memory Playback or RetroActive  
Recording returns to the screen on air.  
Pressing twice during recording stops recording and returns to  
the screen on air.  
HDD  
DVD  
H W  
Pressing once pauses playback (still picture playback).  
Pressing repeatedly advances the still picture frame by frame.  
I JUMP –  
A
Each press of the button during Live Memory Playback jumps  
back for the selected time interval and resumes playback.  
(A pg. 40, AJump SearchB)  
B
J JUMP +  
C
D
Each press of the button during Live Memory Playback jumps  
forward for the selected time interval and resumes playback.  
(A pg. 40, AJump SearchB)  
E
G
F
H
I
J
K
L
K v  
It is useful when skipping over unwanted sections.  
Each press skips forward for approximately 30 seconds and  
resumes playback.  
Pressing repeatedly skips forward continuously as many times  
as pressed.  
M
L w  
It is useful when watching sports programmes, etc.  
Each press skips back for approximately 7 seconds and  
resumes playback.  
Pressing repeatedly skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
continuously as many times as pressed.  
M LIVE CHECK  
You can check, for example, if the programme you are  
recording has already finished.  
Pressing once displays the picture currently being recorded and  
the one being played back simultaneously.  
Pressing successively clears the Live Check window and  
displays only the picture currently being played back.  
A LIVE  
Returns to on air programme screen. When a confirmation  
message appears by pressing this button during timer  
programming or title editing, etc., follow the instruction to return  
to the previous screen.  
B NAVIGATION  
Displays Library Database Navigation menu. You can choose a  
title to play back.  
C S  
Pressing once skips back to the beginning of the chapter being  
played back.  
Pressing down for 2 or more seconds during playback reverses  
playback at 5 times the normal speed while pressed. Releasing  
the button resumes normal playback.  
Available only when paused  
Pressing down for 2 or more seconds reverses playback at 1/16  
times the normal speed.  
D T  
Pressing once skips forward to the beginning of the next  
chapter being played back.  
Pressing down for 2 or more seconds during playback  
advances playback at 5 times the normal speed while pressed.  
Releasing the button resumes normal playback.  
Available only when paused  
Pressing down for 2 or more seconds advances playback at 1/  
16 times the normal speed.  
E O  
Each press of the button during playback advances the  
playback speed in 5 steps in the reverse direction.  
Available only when paused  
Each press of the button reverses the still picture frame by  
frame.  
Pressing down for 2 or more seconds reverses playback at 1/16  
times the normal speed. Then, each press of the button  
reverses slow-motion at 1/16 times, 1/4 times and 1/2 times the  
normal playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
LIVE MEMORY PLAYBACK ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
48  
Temporary recording for Live Memory (HDD deck only) Simultaneous Recording and Playback  
This unit automatically records the channel being received, within  
the specified range of time, to the reserved space on the hard disc.  
The time range can be set for 30 minutes, 1 hour, and 3 hours.  
(A pg. 79)  
You can play back the previous part of the channel you are  
recording or other programs available in the Library Database.  
1 Press NAVIGATION. The Library Database Navigation screen  
appears.  
NOTE:  
2 Press D E to select AORIGINALB, then press ENTER.  
Previous temporary recordings will be overwritten since the unit is  
always recording the channel being received. Thus, it is not  
possible to play back TV programmes recorded beyond the  
specified range of time since they are already overwritten. To avoid  
this in order to save titles, perform normal recording (A pg. 37),  
timer recording (A pg. 49, 51), or RetroActive Recording  
(A pg. 48).  
3 Press FGD E to select the desired title, then press ENTER.  
For DVD-RAM, playback starts from the beginning of the title if  
ACONTINUOUS PLAYB in ADVD SET UPB is set to AONB  
(A pg. 79).  
4 Press D E to select the desired playback method  
(ABEGINNINGB, ARESUMEB or AREPEATB), then press ENTER.  
Playback of the selected title begins automatically.  
About limitation on temporary recording  
The temporary recording for Live Memory is cancelled in the  
following cases, and will start all over again when it is to resume.  
When the power is turned off  
When the system is powered again after a power failure was  
occurred  
When normal recording, timer recording, RetroActive  
Recording, or Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
(A pg. 53) is performed  
When the ALIVE MEMORYB setting is changed (A pg. 79)  
When tuner channel setting is performed (A pg. 83)  
When dubbing is performed by pressing DUBBING (A pg. 64)  
5 Press o to stop playback.  
The on-air screen resumes.  
NOTES:  
You can use various playback features during Live Memory  
Playback. (A pg. 39)  
To stop simultaneous playback, press o. The on-air screen  
resumes. To stop actual recording, press o again.  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position slightly during recording  
or Live Memory Playback.  
Press w.  
8 DVD-RAM  
RetroActive Recording (HDD deck only)  
You can start recording from the previous part of the channel you  
are currently watching (temporarily recorded on the background).  
(A pg. 48, ATemporary recording for Live Memory (HDD deck  
only)B)  
Pressing once during recording skips back for approximately 30  
seconds and starts Live Memory Playback. While pressing once  
during Live Memory Playback skips back for approximately 7  
seconds and resumes playback.  
Each subsequent press skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
and resumes playback.  
Pressing while paused skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
and resumes pause.  
1 Press S or O to locate the point to start recording from.  
Each press of O increases the reverse search speed.  
2 Press R on the unit to start RetroActive Recording. Or while  
holding R, press I on the remote control.  
8 HDD  
Pressing during recording skips back for approximately 7  
seconds and starts Live Memory Playback. While pressing during  
Live Memory Playback skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
and resumes playback.  
3 Press o to stop RetroActive Recording.  
The on-air screen resumes.  
NOTES:  
Each press skips back for approximately 7 seconds and resumes  
playback.  
Pressing while paused skips back for approximately 7 seconds  
and resumes pause.  
You cannot use RetroActive Recording for channels other than  
the channel you are currently watching.  
Recording speed is automatically set to FR65 mode when  
RetroActive Recording is started.  
Temporarily recorded data prior to the beginning of RetroActive  
Recording is erased when RetroActive Recording started.  
Resuming Playback (HDD deck only)  
You can resume playback of a TV broadcast you were recording or  
watching from the point you have paused.  
1 Press W to pause a TV broadcast.  
Recording continues when recording.  
2 Press I to start Live Memory Playback.  
Playback resumes from the paused position.  
3 Press o to resume the on-air screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
TIMER RECORDING ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
49  
7 The a number you entered and the matching timer-  
recording information are displayed on the TV screen. Check  
the programme data.  
c Timer Programming  
To cancel this setting, press RETURN.  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 16  
programmes.  
With the a system, timer programming is greatly simplified  
because each TV programme has a corresponding code number  
which your unit is able to recognise.  
IMPORTANT:  
displayed; if not, see Ac System SetupB (A pg. 83) and  
set the Guide Programme number correctly.  
You can use the remote control to enter the a number.  
Make sure that the unit’s built-in clock is set properly.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press F G to select the desired setting, then press ENTER.  
AINPUT TITLEB (A pg. 58, AModify Title NameB)  
ACATEGORYB (A pg. 59, AModify CategoryB)  
AVPS/PDCB (A pg. 50, AVPS/PDC RecordingB)  
AWEEKLY/DAILYB (A pg. 50, AWeekly/Daily RecordingB)  
AREC MODEB (A pg. 34, ARecording ModeB)  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
9 Press F G to select AOKB, then press ENTER to access the  
Programme Confirmation screen.  
10Press D E to select AEXITB, then press ENTER to complete  
timer programming.  
0 – 9  
To programme another timer, press D E to select  
ACONTINUEB, then press ENTER.  
If APROGRAMME OVERLAPPEDB appears on the TV screen,  
delete or modify the programmes.  
PROGRAMME  
ENTER  
NOTES:  
FGDE  
There may be cases that the a Timer Programming  
function prolongs the stop time of the programming.  
When two successive programmes are recorded on a DVD-RW  
disc with the a Timer Programming function, the  
beginning of the second one may be left off the recording.  
If the copy limited programme is received during timer-recording,  
the unit enters Record Pause mode. Recording starts again if it is  
switched to a recordable broadcast during the time you  
programmed.  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
VPS/PDC#  
IMPORTANT:  
If you have moved to a different area or if a broadcasting  
station’s channel number has been changed, the wrong channel  
number for that station. (A pg. 83, Ac System SetupB)  
1 Load a recordable disc if recording to DVD.  
2 Press PROGRAMME to access the programme top screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select ASHOWVIEWB, then press ENTER.  
When APROGRAMME FULL DELETE UNWANTED TIMER  
PROGRAMMESB appears on the TV screen, you need to  
cancel some of the reserved programmes. (A pg. 52)  
Satellite Receiver Users  
To timer-record a satellite broadcast using the a system:  
A Perform ASatellite Receiver Control Setting (HDD & DVD  
Deck Only)B (A pg. 22).  
4 Press the number keys to  
1
23  
PROGRAMME > SHOWVIEW (1/2)  
enter the a number of  
a programme you wish to  
record.  
B Perform Ac Timer ProgrammingB (A pg. 49).  
C Leave the satellite receiver’s power on.  
SHOWVIEW NO.  
1 2 3 4  
1
4
7
DELETE  
2
5
8
0
3
6
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
OR  
9
PRESS [PROGRAMME]  
TO EXIT  
Press FGD E to select the  
desired number key on the  
screen, then press ENTER.  
Repeat to enter all required  
numbers.  
DELETE ALL  
RECORD TO  
DVD  
PROGRAMME  
EXIT  
ENTER  
CONFIRM  
SELECT  
If you have made a mistake, press FGD E to select ADELETEB  
or ADELETE ALLB, then press ENTER and input the correct  
number before you press ENTER again.  
5 Press F G to select ARECORD TOB, then press ENTER. Press  
F G to select the desired recording deck, then press ENTER.  
6 Press FGD E to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER.  
If the number you entered is invalid, ASHOWVIEW NO. ERROR  
CONFIRM SHOWVIEW NO. THEN RETRYB appears on the TV  
screen. Input a valid a number.  
If AGUIDE PROGRAMME IS NOT SET SET GUIDE  
PROGRAMME THEN RETRYB appears on the TV screen, set  
Guide Programme Numbers manually. (A pg. 83)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
TIMER RECORDING ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
50  
Weekly/Daily Recording  
You can record programmes with one of the following weekly/daily  
timer settings.  
VPS/PDC Recording  
Now available from some TV stations, PDC (Programme Delivery  
Control) and VPS (Video Programme System) are services  
designed to assure safe, accurate timer recording. With this  
system, special code signals are transmitted together with the  
audio/video signals. These code signals control your video unit  
and have precedence over the advertised times you may have  
preset into the timer. This means that your unit will start and stop  
recording when the preset TV programmes actually start and  
end^even if the broadcast time of a preset TV programme is  
changed.  
For the HDD deck  
When you select a mode other than ONCE, the space on the hard  
disk drive is saved for new recordings by overwriting previous  
recordings. To prevent loss of a needed recording, backup  
programmes you wish to save by dubbing them to DVD discs  
before overwriting previous recordings. Or save the title of weekly/  
daily programmes to avoid overwriting of a previous week/day.  
(A pg. 52)  
NOTES:  
ONCE (One Time Recording)  
Make sure to press VPS/PDCj after completing timer  
programming procedure to activate the VPS/PDC recording  
function. The VPS/PDC recording indicator lights up on the front  
display panel when VPS/PDC recording function is activated.  
However, it will blink rapidly when VPS/PDCj is pressed under  
the following conditions:  
In this mode a programme will not be automatically overwritten.  
WEEKLY (OVERWRITE) (Weekly Recording/Weekly Overwrite)  
When the set weekly programme is broadcast, the programme  
recorded last week is automatically deleted and overwritten by  
the new programme. Save the title of each programme you  
wish to save, then the recorded programme is saved and will  
not be overwritten by the new programme.  
Clock is not set.  
Timer programming has not been set.  
Disc is not loaded.  
HDD is full.  
When you use Manual Timer Programming, set the start time  
(VPS or PDC time) exactly as advertised in the TV listing. A  
different time than advertised will result in no recording.  
VPS/PDC recording is also possible when a satellite receiver or a  
cable system is connected to [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector on  
your unit.  
VPS/PDC recording is also possible via the [L-1 IN/OUT]  
connector.  
When timer recording via VPS/PDC recording is in progress, it is  
not possible to switch between the HDD and DVD deck, and the  
following menus cannot be displayed:  
This week’s drama  
Overwritten  
Last week’s drama  
MON-SUN (FOR A WEEK)/ MON-SAT (FOR A WEEK)/  
MON-FRI (FOR A WEEK) (Daily Recording/Weekly Overwrite)  
When the set weekly programme is broadcast, the programme  
recorded on the same day last week is automatically deleted  
and overwritten by the new programme. Save the title of each  
programme you wish to save, then the recorded programme is  
saved and will not be overwritten by the new programme.  
Main Menu  
Library Database Navigation Menu  
Editing Menu  
This  
week  
MON TUE WED THU FRI  
If the unit is powered on when set to record a timer programme  
onto HDD/DVD using VPS/PDC, the PDC information will not be  
used. The programme will be recorded using the start and stop  
times originally programmed.  
Overwritten  
Last  
MON TUE WED THU FRI  
week  
How to check if the station being received transmits a VPS/  
PDC signal  
A Hold down DISPLAY for about 5 seconds. AVPS/PDCB appears  
and blinks on the front display panel. If a VPS/PDC signal is  
detected from the station, AVPS/PDCB will stop blinking. If no  
VPS/PDC signal is detected from the station, AVPS/PDCB will  
blink at a slower rate.  
MON-SUN (OVERWRITE)/ MON-SAT (OVERWRITE)/  
MON-FRI (OVERWRITE) (Daily Recording/Daily Overwrite)  
When the set daily programme is broadcast, yesterday’s  
programme is automatically deleted and overwritten by the new  
programme. Save the title of each programme you wish to  
save, then the recorded programme is saved and will not be  
overwritten by the new programme.  
B Press DISPLAY again to return to normal display.  
Tuesday’s programme  
Overwritten  
Monday’s programme  
For the DVD deck  
ONCE (One Time Recording)  
WEEKLY (Weekly Recording)  
MON-SUN/ MON-SAT/ MON-FRI (Daily Recording)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8 Press F G to select ATV PROGB, then press ENTER. Press  
F G to select the desired channel.  
Manual Timer Programming  
9 Press F G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER.  
10Set the other recording options as required.  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 16  
programmes.  
Refer to step 8 in Ac Timer ProgrammingB (A pg. 49).  
11Press F G to select AOKB,  
If you do not know the a number for the programme you  
wish to record, use the following procedure to set your unit to  
timer-record the programme.  
2
PROGRAMME > CALENDAR PR. (3/3)  
then press ENTER to access  
the Programme Confirmation  
screen.  
14/01/04 WED 22:30 - 23:00  
GARDENING  
BBC1  
[EDUCATION]  
FR360  
1:00  
28:00  
Make sure that the unit’s built-in clock is set properly.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
GARDENING  
EDUCATION  
OFF  
INPUT TITLE  
CATEGORY  
VPS/PDC  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
12Press D E to select AEXITB,  
then press ENTER to  
complete timer  
PRESS[PROGRAMME]  
TO EXIT  
MON-FRI (FOR A WEEK)  
FR360  
WEEKLY/DAILY  
REC MODE  
PROGRAMME  
EXIT  
ENTER  
OK  
SELECT  
programming.  
To programme another timer,  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
press D E to select ACONTINUEB, then press ENTER.  
If APROGRAMME OVERLAPPEDB appears on the TV screen,  
delete or modify the programmes.  
NOTES:  
When two successive programmes are recorded on a DVD-RW  
disc with Manual Timer Programming function, the beginning of  
the second one may be left off the recording.  
If the copy limited programme is received during timer-recording,  
the unit enters Record Pause mode. Recording starts again if it is  
switched to a recordable broadcast during the time you  
programmed.  
AUX  
PROGRAMME  
ENTER  
rtwe  
Satellite Receiver Users  
To timer-record a satellite broadcast using Manual Timer  
Programming:  
A Perform ASatellite Receiver Control Setting (HDD & DVD  
Deck Only)B (A pg. 22).  
B Perform AManual Timer ProgrammingB (A pg. 51).  
In step 8, press AUX to change ATV PROGB to ASATB. Then  
press F G to enter the channel position for the satellite  
broadcast.  
C Leave the satellite receiver’s power on.  
1 Load a recordable disc if recording to DVD.  
2 Press PROGRAMME to access the programme top screen.  
Relief Recording  
3 Press FGD E to select ACALENDAR PR.B, then press ENTER.  
When APROGRAMME FULL DELETE UNWANTED TIMER  
PROGRAMMESB appears on the TV screen, you need to  
cancel some of the reserved programmes. (A pg. 52)  
When a programme that is set for the DVD deck cannot be  
recorded properly, the programme is recorded to the HDD deck  
instead in XP mode.  
If the remaining capacity of the hard disc is not sufficient, the  
programme is recorded to the DVD deck until the remaining  
capacity of the DVD disc lasts.  
If AJUSTB is selected for the recording mode, the current  
recording mode for the DVD deck is applied.  
4 Press FGD E to select the desired date, then press ENTER.  
5 Press F G to select ARECORD  
2
PROGRAMME > CALENDAR PR. (2/3)  
TOB, then press ENTER. Press  
F G to select the desired  
recording deck, then press  
ENTER.  
14/01/04 WED 22:30 - 23:00  
BBC1  
[MISC.  
]
XP  
RECORD TO  
START  
HDD  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
22:30  
23:00  
BBC1  
STOP  
PRESS[PROGRAMME]  
TO EXIT  
[0]: SAT  
TV PROG  
6 Press F G to select ASTARTB,  
then press ENTER. Press F G  
to set the desired start time,  
then press ENTER.  
PROGRAMME  
EXIT  
ENTER  
CONFIRM  
SELECT  
Each press of F G increases/decreases the start time in 1-  
minute interval.  
To increase/decrease the start time in 30-minutes interval,  
press and hold F G.  
7 Press F G to select ASTOPB, then press ENTER. Press F G to  
set the desired stop time, then press ENTER.  
Each press of F G increases/decreases the stop time in 1-  
minute interval.  
To increase/decrease the stop time in 30-minutes interval,  
press and hold F G.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
TIMER RECORDING ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
52  
Check Programmes  
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
To check the whole list of programmes  
1 Press PROGRAMME to access the programme top screen.  
2 Press FGD E to select APROGRAMME LISTB, then press  
ENTER.  
The details of a selected programme appear on the top of the  
screen.  
The daily programme of a title is listed as one programme.  
PROGRAMME  
To check the list of programmes by date  
ENTER  
1 Press PROGRAMME to access the programme top screen.  
2 Press FGD E to select ACALENDAR LISTB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press F G to select the desired date, then press ENTER.  
rtwe  
Cancel And Change Programmes  
Repeat steps in ACheck ProgrammesB to select a programme  
before proceeding.  
To cancel the programme  
1 Press FGD E to select ACANCELB, then press ENTER.  
To modify the programme settings  
1 Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB, then press ENTER.  
2 Change the settings of the desired recording options as  
required.  
Refer to steps 4 12 in AManual Timer ProgrammingB  
(A pg. 51).  
To skip the weekly/daily programmes to the next week/day  
It is easy to temporarily cancel weekly/daily programmes of a  
week/day.  
1 Press FGD E to select APROGRAMME SKIPB, then press  
ENTER.  
2 Press D E to select ASKIPB, then press ENTER.  
To save the titles of weekly/daily programmes (HDD Deck  
Only)  
Use this function to avoid overwriting titles of weekly/daily  
programmes of a previous week/day.  
1 Press FGD E to select ATITLE SAVEB, then press ENTER.  
2 Press D E to select ASAVEB, then press ENTER.  
NOTE:  
This function is available only when the remaining capacity of the  
hard disc is sufficient.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
TIMER RECORDING ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
53  
Make sure the satellite receiver is connected to the unit’s [L-2  
IN/DECODER] connector.  
Programme the timer on the satellite receiver.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Automatic Satellite Programme  
Recording  
(HDD Deck Only)  
1 Press HDD on the remote to choose the recording deck. You  
can also press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly  
to select the recording deck.  
This function allows you to automatically record a satellite  
programme which is timer-programmed on your external satellite  
receiver. Connect a satellite receiver to the unit’s [L-2 IN/  
DECODER] connector and programme the timer on the satellite  
receiver. The unit starts or stops recording by the signals input  
from the satellite receiver. After recording, the unit’s power shuts  
off automatically.  
2 Set AL-2 SELECTB to ASAT VIDEOB or ASAT S-VIDEOB.  
(A pg. 72)  
Also refer to AIMPORTANTB on page 76.  
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to set the recording mode.  
4 Press and hold SATj for about 2 seconds to engage the  
Automatic Satellite Programme Recording mode. AVB and  
ASATjB appear on the front display panel.  
ATTENTION:  
Be sure not to turn on the satellite receiver before the  
programme is executed; otherwise, the unit will start recording  
when the satellite receiver’s power is turned on.  
If you have connected another appliance other than a satellite  
receiver to the [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector, be sure not to  
engage the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording mode;  
otherwise, the unit will start recording when the connected  
appliance’s power is turned on.  
NOTES:  
To disengage the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
mode, press SATj.  
If the unit’s power is off, it is not possible to engage the Automatic  
Satellite Programme Recording mode.  
In step 4, if AVB blinks quickly on the front display panel even  
though your satellite receiver’s power is off, Automatic Satellite  
Programme Recording will not work properly with that satellite  
receiver*. If this is the case, perform AManual Timer  
ProgrammingB (A pg. 51) to timer-record a satellite programme.  
* Some satellite receivers output signals even if the power is off. Automatic  
Satellite Programme Recording is not possible with those satellite  
receivers.  
Automatic Satellite Programme Recording and timer-recording  
cannot be done at the same time.  
VHS/HDD/DVD  
SELECT  
AVB blinks on the front display panel while Automatic Satellite  
Programme Recording is in progress.  
For timer programming of the satellite receiver, refer to the  
instruction manual of the satellite receiver.  
Automatic Satellite Programme Recording is not possible if your  
satellite receiver does not have a timer.  
Pressing the unit’s A button while Automatic Satellite  
Programme Recording is in progress turns off the unit’s power  
and disengages the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
mode.  
REC MODE  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
If there are more than one satellite programmes you wish to  
record with Automatic Satellite Programme Recording, it is not  
possible to set different recording modes for each programme.  
Depending on the type of satellite receiver, the unit may not  
record a slight portion of the beginning of the programme or may  
record slightly longer than the actual length of the programme.  
If you engage the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
mode when the satellite receiver’s power is on, the unit will not  
start Automatic Satellite Programme Recording even though AVB  
HDD  
blinks on the front display panel. When the satellite receiver  
shuts off once and is turned back on again, the unit starts  
recording.  
You can also record a programme from your cable system in the  
same way if the system has a timer.  
Just Clock (A pg. 86) does not work when the Automatic  
Satellite Programme Recording mode is engaged.  
REC MODE  
SAT#  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TIMER RECORDING ON VHS DECK  
EN  
54  
IMPORTANT:  
b Timer Programming  
Make sure the channel position number you wish to record is  
displayed; if not, see Ac System SetupB (A pg. 83) and  
set the Guide Programme number correctly.  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 8  
programmes.  
With the a system, timer programming is greatly simplified  
because each TV programme has a corresponding code number  
which your unit is able to recognise.  
7 Press REC MODE to select the desired recording mode. Or  
press D E to select ASP/LPB, then press F G to select the  
desired recording mode.  
You can use the remote control to enter the a number.  
8 Press D E to select AVPS/PDCB, then press F G to select the  
desired channel.  
Make sure that the unit’s built-in clock is set properly.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
9 Press ENTER to complete timer programming.  
To programme another timer, repeat steps 3 9.  
If APROGRAM OVERLAPPEDB appears on the TV screen, see  
page 56.  
CABLE/SAT  
10Press VHSj to engage the unit’s timer mode. The VHS  
recording lamp lights up on the unit and the HDD or DVD deck  
is automatically selected. Press A to turn off the unit. When  
the HDD or DVD deck is in timer standby mode, the unit is  
automatically turned off.  
TV  
DVD  
VHS  
0-9  
The VHS timer indicator lights up on the front display panel  
when the VHS deck is set to the timer recording standby  
mode by pressing VHSj. However, it will blink rapidly when  
VHSj is pressed under the following conditions:  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
PROGRAMME  
Clock is not set.  
Timer programming has not been set.  
Cassette is not loaded.  
rtwe  
Timer recording standby mode with a cassette without record safety  
tab inserted  
To disengage the timer mode, press VHSj again.  
If you have moved to a different area or if a broadcasting  
station’s programme number has been changed, the wrong  
programme number will be displayed on the a  
programme screen in step 6. When this happens, set the correct  
Guide Programme number for that station. (A pg. 83, Ac  
System SetupB)  
REC MODE  
VHS#  
NOTES:  
To Timer-Record Weekly Or Daily Serials:  
1 Load a cassette with the record safety tab intact.  
2 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 Press PROGRAMME to access  
^ in step 6, press number keys A9B for weekly serials or  
number keys A8B for daily serials (Monday - Friday). Either  
AWEEKLYB or ADAILYB appears on the TV screen. Pressing the  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 8  
programmes. If you try to programme the unit to record a ninth,  
APROGRAM FULLB appears on the TV screen and AFULLB  
appears on the front display panel. To record the extra  
programme, you must first cancel any unnecessary programmes.  
(A pg. 56)  
PROGRAMME  
the Programme screen.  
NSHOWVIEW PRGM  
PROGRAMME/CONFIRM  
4 Press F G to select  
ASHOWVIEW PRGMB, then  
press ENTER.  
[JK] N [ENTER]  
[PROGRAMME] : EXIT  
To record the programmes received by satellite receiver, record  
on the HDD or the DVD discs. For details, refer to Ac Timer  
ProgrammingB (A pg. 49)  
5 Press the number keys to enter  
the a number of a  
programme you wish to record,  
then press ENTER.  
If you have made a mistake,  
[0-9] N [ENTER]  
press CANCEL and input the  
correct number before you press  
ENTER.  
If the number you entered is  
[L] : DELETE  
[PROGRAMME] : EXIT  
SHOWVIEW SYSTEM  
invalid, AERRORB appears on the TV screen and AErrB appears  
on the front display panel.  
Press CANCEL and input a valid a number.  
6 The a number you  
entered and the matching timer-  
DATE  
START  
STOP  
recording information are  
displayed on the TV screen.  
Check the programme data.  
To cancel this setting, press  
PROGRAMME.  
TV PROG  
DAILY/WEEKLY  
MON-FRI  
ARD  
VPS/PDC  
OFF  
SP/LP  
SP  
CURSOR : [HI] SELECT : [JK]  
CONFIRM : [ENTER]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
TIMER RECORDING ON VHS DECK  
EN  
55  
7 Press D E to select ASTOPB, then press F G to set the desired  
stop time.  
Manual Timer Programming  
Each press of F G increases/decreases the stop time in 1-  
minute interval.  
To increase/decrease the stop time in 30-minutes interval,  
press and hold F G.  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 8  
programmes. If you do not know the a number for the  
programme you wish to record, use the following procedure to set  
your unit to timer-record the programme.  
8 Press D E to select ADATEB, then press F G to set the desired  
date.  
Make sure that the unit’s built-in clock is set properly.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
The current date appears on the TV screen. The date you enter  
appears in its place.  
9 Press D E to select ATV PROGB, then press F G to select the  
desired channel.  
10 Press REC MODE to select the desired recording mode. Or  
press D E to select ASP/LPB, then press F G to select the  
desired recording mode.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
VHS  
11Press D E to select AVPS/PDCB, then press F G to select the  
desired channel.  
0-9  
12 Press ENTER to access the Programme Check screen.  
13 Press PROGRAMME to complete timer programming.  
APROGRAM COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen for  
about 5 seconds, then the normal screen appears. If  
APROGRAM OVERLAPPEDB appears on the TV screen, see  
page 56.  
PROGRAMME  
rtwe  
To programme another timer, repeat steps 3 13.  
ENTER  
14 Press VHSj to engage the unit’s timer mode. The VHS  
recording lamp lights up on the unit and the HDD or DVD deck  
is automatically selected. Press A to turn off the unit. When  
the HDD or DVD deck is in timer standby mode, the unit is  
automatically turned off.  
REC MODE  
To disengage the timer mode, press VHSj again.  
NOTES:  
To Timer-Record Weekly Or Daily Serials:  
^ anytime during steps 8 through 10, press number keys A9B for  
weekly serials or number keys A8B for daily serials (Monday -  
Friday).  
VHS#  
Either AWEEKLYB or ADAILYB appears on the TV screen.  
Pressing the button again makes the corresponding indication  
disappear.  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 8  
programmes. If you try to programme the unit to record a ninth,  
APROGRAM FULLB appears on the TV screen. To record the  
extra programme, you must first cancel any unnecessary  
programmes. (A pg. 56)  
In case of a power failure after programming, the unit’s memory  
backup keeps your selections for approximately 5 seconds.  
Programmes that start after midnight must have the next day’s  
date.  
To record the programmes received by satellite receiver, record  
on the HDD or the DVD discs. For details, refer to AManual Timer  
ProgrammingB (A pg. 51).  
1 Load a cassette with the record safety tab intact.  
2 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 Press PROGRAMME to access the Programme screen.  
4 Press F G to select  
PROGRAMME  
APROGRAMME/CONFIRMB, then  
SHOWVIEW PRGM  
NPROGRAMME/CONFIRM  
press ENTER access the  
Programme Check screen.  
[JK] N [ENTER]  
[PROGRAMME] : EXIT  
5 Press F G to select the blank  
DATE  
START  
STOP  
CH  
number, then press ENTER. The  
programme screen appears.  
VPS/PDC Recording  
Now available from some TV stations, PDC (Programme Delivery  
Control) and VPS (Video Programme System) are services  
designed to assure safe, accurate timer recording. With this  
system, special code signals are transmitted together with the  
audio/video signals. These code signals control your video unit  
and have precedence over the advertised times you may have  
preset into the timer. This means that your unit will start and stop  
recording when the preset TV programmes actually start and  
end^even if the broadcast time of a preset TV programme is  
changed.  
[JK] N [ENTER]  
[PROGRAMME] : EXIT  
6 Press D E to select ASTARTB,  
then press F G to set the desired  
start time.  
Each press of F G increases/  
decreases the start time in 1-  
minute interval.  
To increase/decrease the start  
time in 30-minutes interval, press  
and hold F G.  
STOP  
START  
DATE  
DAILY/WEEKLY  
MON-FRI  
TV PROG  
ARD  
VPS/PDC  
OFF  
SP/LP  
SP  
NOTES:  
CURSOR : [HI] SELECT : [JK]  
When you use Manual Timer Programming, set the start time  
(VPS or PDC time) exactly as advertised in the TV listing. A  
different time than advertised will result in no recording.  
VPS/PDC recording is not possible when a satellite receiver or a  
cable system is connected to [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector on  
your unit.  
CONFIRM : [ENTER]  
VPS/PDC recording is also possible via the [L-1 IN/OUT]  
connector.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
TIMER RECORDING ON VHS DECK  
EN  
56  
When Programmes Overlap Each Other  
If APROGRAM OVERLAPPEDB appears, you have another  
programme overlapping the programme you have just made.  
The Programme Check screen appears and conflicting  
programmes will start blinking.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
VHS  
1
STOP  
DATE START  
CH  
PROGRAM OVERLAPPED  
DAILY  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
PROGRAMME  
[JK] N [ENTER]  
[PROGRAMME] : EXIT  
rtwe  
Example: Programme 1 (you have just made) and Programme  
4 overlap each other.  
1 Confirm the overlapping programmes. Overlapping  
programmes blink on the TV screen.  
2 Press F G to select the programme to modify, then press  
ENTER or E.  
You can only select one of the overlapping programmes.  
VHS#  
NOTE:  
If you do not mind this overlap, press PROGRAMME to finish the  
timer programme setting. The programme with the lower  
programme number will be recorded and the other one will not be  
recorded correctly. If no changes are made for approximately 1  
minute, the unit will return to the normal screen.  
Check, Cancel And Change Programmes  
3 Press F G to select the desired programme to be cancelled or  
1 When the VHS recording lamp (R) lights up on the unit  
changed.  
Press VHSj, then press DVD A.  
When the VHS lamp does not light up on the unit  
Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
To cancel the programme  
Press CANCEL.  
APROGRAM COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen for about  
5 seconds, then the normal screen resumes.  
2 Press PROGRAMME to access  
DATE  
STOP  
START  
CH  
the Programme screen.  
To change the programme setting  
3 Press F G to select  
Press ENTER, then go to step 4.  
APROGRAMME/CONFIRMB,  
then press ENTER to access the  
Programme Check screen.  
4 Change the programme setting.  
Refer to steps 6 12 in AManual Timer ProgrammingB  
(A pg. 55).  
[JK]N[ENTER]  
[PROGRAMME] : EXIT  
5 Press PROGRAMME to access the Programme screen, then  
press F G to select APROGRAMME/CONFIRMB to check if the  
conflict has been settled.  
4 Press F G to select the  
programme, then press ENTER.  
The programme screen appears.  
DATE  
START  
STOP  
Programme check screen appears.  
APROGRAM COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen for  
about 5 seconds, then the normal screen resumes.  
TV PROG  
DAILY/WEEKLY  
MON-FRI  
To cancel a programme  
Press CANCEL.  
VPS/PDC  
OFF  
SP/LP  
SP  
6 Press VHSj.  
CURSOR : [HI] SELECT : [JK]  
NOTE:  
CONFIRM : [ENTER]  
When any overlaps remain after deletion and modification of  
programmes, Programme Check screen remains showing the  
conflicting programmes. In such a case, repeat the procedure  
above until the conflict is solved.  
5 Change the settings of the desired recording options as  
required.  
Refer to steps 6 12 in AManual Timer ProgrammingB  
(A pg. 55).  
6 Press PROGRAMME to complete timer correction. The  
previous screen resumes.  
7 Press VHSj.  
The VHS recording lamp lights up on the unit and the HDD or  
DVD deck is automatically selected. When the HDD or DVD  
deck is in timer standby mode, the unit is automatically turned  
off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
NAVIGATION ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
57  
Using Library Database Navigation system, you can easily modify  
registered information, edit the title or play list, as well as search  
for the beginning of each title.  
Library Database Navigation  
About registration of information  
The following information is automatically registered for each title  
when ordinary recording or timer recording is performed, then  
stored in an area specified on the unit.  
index* (reduced pictures to show programme titles)  
programme title*  
category*  
date and time  
channel  
recording mode  
The Library Database Navigation enables you to search and select  
the desired titles recorded on the HDD deck and the DVD deck  
very easily.  
You can record up to 99 titles on a disc.  
Each time a title is recorded, the information of the title is  
registered for the Library Database Navigation automatically.  
So, you can confirm the information of the titles recorded with the  
Library Database Navigation screen. And, you can also select one  
of the titles recorded using the Library Database Navigation.  
The following screen appears as the Library Database Navigation  
screen when you press NAVIGATION. You can move the arrow to  
select the desired position on the screen by pressing FGD E on  
the remote control.  
length of recording time  
The items marked with an asterisk (*) can be easily modified and  
registered again after recording by using Library Database  
Navigation system.  
The limitations of registration  
You can register information up to 99 titles for the DVD deck and  
200 titles for the HDD deck.  
When the amount of information is at the limits of registration, you  
cannot record new titles any more. In this case, you need to delete  
old titles to register new one. (A pg. 59)  
NAVIGATION > ORIGINAL  
0026 [FISH WORLD  
25/12/03 THU 10:00 - 10:15  
FROG WORLD  
]
143 MIN  
A
PR.  
3
D
E
[HOBBY]  
EP  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [NAVIGATION]  
TO EXIT  
NOTES:  
B
C
Once a DVD-R/RW (Video mode) disc has been finalised, the  
displays for original and play list do not appear. Only display for  
library appears.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
NAVIGATION  
EXIT  
F
G
When you move the title recorded on HDD to DVD, the icon will  
be changed to  
.
A Playback screen  
Sound of received channel may be interrupted while the Library  
Database Navigation screen is displayed.  
The order of index which are displayed by pressing DUBBING  
differs from the images displayed by pressing NAVIGATION or  
EDIT.  
You cannot perform timer recording during editing of thumbnail  
images or play lists by pressing EDIT. Press EDIT to clear the  
Editing screen before performing timer recording.  
(Indicates currently received TV programme.)  
B Guidance for operations  
C Scroll bar  
(Appears when there are over nine registered titles (or play  
lists). The scroll bar only indicates that there are more titles (or  
play lists) hidden off the current screen display. To show hidden  
titles (or play lists), press FGD E repeatedly.)  
D Recording information for the title indicated by the arrow  
E Index list  
(Thumbnail still of each title)  
Thumbnail still is not to be played back.  
F Index  
:Indicates no index is registered.  
:Indicates title in standby for timer recording.  
:Indicates no title is registered.  
G Icons  
(Indicate the record condition of each title.)  
The Icons and their meanings  
This title is write-protected.  
This title was recorded with timer recording.  
This title is Weekly Recording/Weekly Overwrite.  
This title is Daily Recording/Daily Overwrite.  
This title is Daily Recording/Weekly Overwrite.  
This title has not been played back.  
W
D
D
NEW  
This title is copy-protected.  
This title can only be recorded once (copy-once title).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NAVIGATION ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
58  
Scan For Beginning Of Title  
Edit Original Information  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press HDD or DVD to choose the corresponding deck.  
Load a DVD disc to scan.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press HDD or DVD to choose the corresponding deck.  
Load a DVD disc to modify.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
HDD  
DVD  
ATTENTION:  
It is not possible to modify discs recorded on DVD units from  
other manufacturers.  
You cannot perform timer recording during editing the index by  
pressing EDIT. Press EDIT to clear the editing screen before  
performing timer recording.  
MEMO  
NAVIGATION  
ENTER  
rtwe  
Modify Index  
1 Press EDIT. The Editing screen appears.  
4
9
2 (DVD deck only) Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB under  
8
AORIGINAL/PLAY LISTB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB under AORIGINALB, then  
press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select one title you want to modify, then press  
ENTER.  
5 Press D E to select AINDEXB.  
6 Search for the picture from the  
EDITING > MODIFY INDEX  
title by pressing the  
25/12/03 THU 10:00 - 10:15  
FROG WORLD  
PR  
3
[OTHERS]  
SP  
INDEX  
appropriate buttons (O, I,  
N, or W). The pictures of the  
title appear on the left window.  
You can scan the beginning of the title easily with the Library  
Database Navigation.  
1 Press NAVIGATION. The Library Database Navigation screen  
PROG.  
1
0 : 01 : 03  
7 Confirm the arrow is on  
AREPLACEB, then press  
ENTER to register new index.  
New index appears on the  
right window.  
SELECT IMAGE TO REPLACE WITH  
ON REMOTE  
RETURN  
appears.  
REPLACE  
2 Press FGD E to select AORIGINALB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press FGD E to select the  
NAVIGATION > ORIGINAL  
index (small pictures) of the  
0026 [FISH WORLD  
25/12/03 THU 10:00 - 10:15  
]
143 MIN  
PR.  
3
When you press ENTER with the arrow on ARETURNB you can  
desired title, then press  
ENTER.  
[HOBBY]  
FROG WORLD  
EP  
return to the previous screen.  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
When you want the plural titles  
to be played back  
8 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
PRESS [NAVIGATION]  
TO EXIT  
continuously, press MEMO  
after selecting the desired title.  
The numbers of the playback  
order appear on the index. You can select up to 8 titles.  
When you want to correct the order, move the arrow to the  
desired index and press MEMO. The number disappears and  
the unit re-numbers the other programmes automatically.  
When you want to cancel the order, press CANCEL(L).  
NAVIGATION  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Modify Title Name  
SELECT  
1 Perform steps 1 4 of AModify IndexB (A pg. 58) before  
continuing.  
2 Press FGD E to select ANAMEB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press FGD E to select the  
A
BC EDITING > MODIFY NAME  
desired letter or symbol, then  
press ENTER. Repeat this  
process to complete the name.  
To correct a letter, press  
FGD E to select ADELETEB,  
then press ENTER.  
0026 [FISH WORLD  
25/12/03 THU 10:00 - 10:15  
FROG WORLD  
]
64 MIN  
PR.  
3
XP  
[HOBBY]  
4 Press D E to select  
F ROG  
W
OR L D  
NAVIGATION > ORIGINAL  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
ABEGINNINGB, then press  
ALPHABET SYMBOL1  
SYMBOL2  
25/12/03 THU  
SP  
A
G
M
S
B
H
N
T
C
I
D
J
E
K
F
L
R
X
a
g
b
h
n
t
c
i
d
j
e
k
f
l
1
4
7
0
?
&
2
5
8
+
!
3
6
9
-
10:00  
-
10:15  
PR.  
3
PRESS [EDIT]  
TO EXIT  
ENTER.  
FROG WORLD  
O
U
P
V
Q
W
m
s
o
u
p
v
q
w
r
x
[HOBBY]  
To resume playback from the  
point where playback was  
previously stopped, press D E  
to select ARESUMEB, then  
press ENTER.  
Y
Z
y
z
"
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
'
@
SELECT HOW TO PLAY BACK  
BEGINNING RESUME REPEAT  
EDIT  
EXIT  
ENTER  
CANCEL  
DELETE  
SAVE  
PRESS [NAVIGATION]  
TO EXIT  
You can enter the letters up to  
64.  
SELECT  
NAVIGATION  
EXIT  
ENTER  
4 Press FGD E to select ASAVEB, then press ENTER.  
5 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
SELECT  
To repeat playback of a  
selected title, press D E to select AREPEATB, then press  
ENTER.  
5 Press W to pause playback.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
6 Press o to stop playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
59  
Modify Category  
Delete Unwanted Part Of The Title  
(DVD-RAM & DVD-RW (VR mode) only)  
1 Perform steps 1 4 of AModify IndexB (A pg. 58) before  
continuing.  
You can delete unwanted part of the title.  
2 Press FGD E to select ACATEGORYB, then press ENTER.  
1 Perform steps 1 3 of AModify IndexB (A pg. 58) before  
continuing.  
3 Press FGD E to select the  
EDITING > MODIFY CATEGORY  
desired category, then press  
ENTER.  
0026 [FISH WORLD  
25/12/03 THU 10:00 - 10:15  
]
64 MIN  
PR.  
[HOBBY]  
2 Press FGD E to select ADEL SCENB, then press ENTER.  
3
FROG WORLD  
XP  
3 Press FGD E to select one title whose unwanted part you want  
MOVIES  
MUSIC  
DRAMA  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
4 Press EDIT to return to the  
to delete, then press ENTER.  
ANIMATION  
NEWS  
SPORTS  
DOCUMENTARY  
EDUCATION  
normal screen.  
PRESS [EDIT]  
TO EXIT  
4 The playback pictures appear in the window on the screen. The  
elapsed playing time starts counting with the arrow on AINB.  
WEATHER  
EDIT  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SELECT  
HOBBY  
ENTERTAINMENT ART  
5 Find the point where you want  
EDITING > ORIGINAL/DEL SCENE  
the deletion to begin, then  
press ENTER with the arrow  
on AINB. The edit-in time is  
fixed and the elapsed playing  
time starts counting again.  
21/12/03 SUN 18:30 - 20:00  
RALLY CAR  
PR. 12  
[OTHERS]  
SP  
IN  
Protect Title (DVD-RAM & DVD-RW (VR mode) only)  
You can protect titles to prevent accidental erasure of the  
important titles.  
0 : 05 :15  
OUT  
0 : 06 :15  
PROG.  
1
0 : 01 : 03  
SELECT SCENE TO REPLACE WITH  
ON REMOTE  
1 Perform steps 1 3 of AModify IndexB (A pg. 58) before  
6 Find the point where you want  
the deletion to end, then press  
ENTER with the arrow on  
IN OUT  
PREVIEW  
OK  
continuing.  
2 Press FGD E to select APROTECTB, then press ENTER.  
AOUTB. The edit-out time is fixed.  
3 Press FGD E to select a title you want to protect, then press  
Press O, I, N, S, T or W to find the edit-in and edit-out  
points.  
ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select APROTECTB, then press ENTER. A  
appears.  
To cancel the protection, repeat 3 4 again. In step 4, select  
ACANCEL PROTECTB, then press ENTER.  
B
7 Press D E to select APREVIEWB, then press ENTER to preview  
the edited title.  
8 Press D E to select AOKB, then press ENTER.  
If you do not want to delete the scene, press EDIT or RETURN.  
5 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
To modify the points  
A Press EDIT or RETURN.  
B Repeat steps 4 8 as necessary.  
NOTE:  
All the titles on a disc will be deleted once the disc is formatted  
even if they are protected titles. (A pg. 59)  
9 Press D E to select ADELETEB, then press ENTER. The  
selected scene is deleted.  
Delete Title  
To cancel the deletion, press D E to select ACANCELB, then  
press ENTER.  
You cannot record any more with Library Database Navigation  
once the registered titles on the disc reach 99 titles for the DVD  
10Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
deck and 200 titles for the HDD deck. Deleting unnecessary titles  
after dubbing or other operations can increase remaining time and  
available recording capacity. (For DVD-R discs, although it is  
possible to delete recorded titles, available recording capacity  
does not increase.) The deleted title is never resumed. Play lists  
and title information in the unit’s library are also deleted.  
NOTES:  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the  
scene you intend to edit, and the scene which is actually edited.  
Available recording capacity may not match the deleted part after  
deletion.  
1 Press EDIT. The Editing screen appears.  
2 Press FGD E to select ADELETEB under AORIGINALB, then  
press ENTER.  
3 Press FGD E to select one title you want to delete, then press  
ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select ADELETEB, then press ENTER.  
When you cancel the deletion, select ACANCELB, then press  
ENTER.  
5 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
NAVIGATION ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
60  
Divide Title (HDD deck only)  
Edit Play List Information  
1 Press EDIT. The Editing screen appears.  
2 Press FGD E to select ADIVIDEB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press FGD E to select a title to divide, then press ENTER.  
4 Press I, and press O or N to locate a point to divide, then  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press HDD or DVD to choose the corresponding deck.  
Load a DVD disc to modify.  
press W.  
5 Confirm the arrow is on ADIVIDEB, then press ENTER at the  
dividing point.  
The first picture (start) of the newly created title appears in the  
bottom right window.  
ATTENTION:  
6 Press D E to select APREVIEWB, then press ENTER.  
The first several seconds of the newly created title is played  
back, then the playback pauses at the dividing point.  
To undo the division, press D E to select ARETRYB, then press  
ENTER. Repeat the above procedure to locate another point to  
divide.  
It is not possible to modify discs recorded on DVD units from  
other manufacturers.  
You cannot perform timer recording during editing the index by  
pressing EDIT. Press EDIT to clear the editing screen before  
performing timer recording.  
7 Press D E to select AOKB, then press ENTER.  
8 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
NOTE:  
HDD  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the  
DVD  
Modify Chapter  
(HDD, DVD-RAM & DVD-RW (VR mode) only)  
You can create and delete chapter marks in titles.  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
MEMO  
EDIT  
NAVIGATION  
1 Perform steps 1 4 of AModify IndexB (A pg. 58) before  
continuing.  
rtwe  
2 Press FGD E to select ACHAPTERB, then press ENTER.  
6
4
5
2
3
3 Confirm the arrow is on  
EDITING > MODIFY CHAPTER  
AMARKB, then press ENTER at  
CHAPTER  
03/10  
positions you want to mark.  
The newly created chapter is  
displayed.  
9
8
0 : 07 : 01  
To undo the marking, press  
D E to select ARETRYB, then  
press ENTER. Repeat the  
above procedure to locate  
another point to mark.  
01 00 : 00 : 00  
02 00 : 05 : 30  
03 00 : 07 : 00  
04 00 : 30 : 00  
RETURN  
MARK  
ERASE  
RETRY  
4 Press I, and press O or N to select one chapter you want  
to delete, then press W.  
Play List  
5 Press D E to select AERASEB, then press ENTER.  
The selected chapter is deleted.  
It is a collection of the scenes. A play list can be freely edited and  
played back without ever changing any original recording data.  
Using the random access of a disc (which allows video data to be  
instantly read no matter where it is on the disc), a play list includes  
information such as the timer counter for the playback start point  
and end point, indexes for checking the contents of recorded data,  
category information, and more. Playback according to a play list  
you have created allows you to enjoy various combinations of  
video images from a single title.  
To undo the deletion, press D E to select ARETRYB, then press  
ENTER. Repeat the above procedure to locate another point to  
delete.  
6 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
NOTE:  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the  
scene you intend to edit, and the scene which is actually edited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NAVIGATION ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
61  
Create Play List  
Add scenes  
1 Press EDIT. The Editing screen appears.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 in AEdit ScenesB (A pg. 61) before  
continuing.  
2 (DVD deck only) Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB under  
AORIGINAL/PLAY LISTB, then press ENTER.  
2 Press FGD E to select ASEL. TITLEB, then press ENTER.  
3 Perform steps 4 10 in ACreate Play ListB (A pg. 61).  
3 Press FGD E to select ACREATEB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select a title that includes scenes to be  
Move Scenes  
included in a play list, then press ENTER.  
5 The playback pictures appear in the window on the screen. The  
elapsed playing time starts counting with the arrow on AIN/  
OUTB.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 of AEdit ScenesB (A pg. 61) before  
continuing.  
2 Press FGD E to select AMOVEB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press F G to select a scene to move, then press ENTER.  
6 Find the point where you want  
EDITING > PLAY LIST/CREATE  
TOTAL  
00 : 00 : 00  
PAGE  
the created play list to begin,  
then press ENTER with the  
arrow on AIN/OUTB. The edit-in  
time is fixed and the elapsed  
playing time starts counting  
again.  
SCENE  
1 / 1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PRO.  
1
4 Press F G to select another scene to which the scene is to be  
moved, then press ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
PRO.  
1
0 : 00 :15  
IN  
OUT  
IN/OUT  
SEL. TITLE  
MODIFY  
DELETE  
MOVE  
PREVIEW  
OK  
5 Perform steps 8 10 in ACreate Play ListB (A pg. 61).  
RETRY  
7 Find the point where you want  
the created play list to end,  
Delete Scenes  
then press ENTER with the arrow on AIN/OUTB. The edit-out  
time is fixed.  
Press O, I, N, S, T or W to find the edit-in and edit-out  
points.  
The edit-out point must come after the edit-in point.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 of ACreate Play ListB (A pg. 61) before  
continuing.  
2 Press FGD E to select ADELETEB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press F G to select a scene to delete, then press ENTER.  
4 Perform steps 8 10 in ACreate Play ListB (A pg. 61).  
8 Press FGD E to select APREVIEWB, then press ENTER to  
preview the play list.  
9 Press FGD E to select AOKB, then press ENTER. The play list  
Play Back Play List  
is created.  
1 Press NAVIGATION. The Library Database Navigation screen  
To modify the points  
A Press D E to select AMODIFYB, then press ENTER.  
B Repeat steps 5 9 as necessary.  
appears.  
2 Press FGD E to select APLAY LISTB, then press ENTER.  
10Press D E to select AEXITB, then press ENTER to return to the  
3 Press FGD E to select the  
NAVIGATION > PLAY LIST  
normal screen.  
index (small pictures) of the  
0026 [FISH WORLD  
026 CREATED 26/12/03 FRI  
TEDDY BEAR 25/12  
]
143 MIN  
desired play list, then press  
ENTER.  
When you want the plural play  
lists to be played back  
continuously, press MEMO  
after selecting the desired play  
lists. The numbers of the  
[MOVIES]  
NOTES:  
001  
004  
007  
002  
005  
008  
003  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the  
scene you intend to edit, and the scene which is actually edited.  
The title, index and category of the play list can be modified in the  
same way as AORIGINALB. (A pg. 58)  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
006  
009  
PRESS [NAVIGATION]  
TO EXIT  
NAVIGATION  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SELECT  
You can modify the play list that has just been created here by  
adding, moving, or deleting unwanted parts to create a digest  
edition, etc.  
playback order appear on the index. You can select up to 30  
play lists.  
When you want to correct the order, move the arrow to the  
desired index and press MEMO. The number disappears and  
the unit re-numbers the other play lists automatically.  
When you want to cancel the order, press CANCEL(L).  
Edit Scenes  
1 Press EDIT. The Editing screen appears.  
2 (DVD deck only) Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB under  
4 Press D E to select ABEGINNINGB, then press ENTER. The  
AORIGINAL/PLAY LISTB, then press ENTER.  
playback starts.  
3 Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB under APLAY LISTB, then  
press ENTER.  
5 Press W to pause playback.  
To resume normal playback, press I.  
4 Press FGD E to select a play list to modify, then press ENTER.  
5 Press FGD E to select ASCENEB, then press ENTER.  
6 Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB, then press ENTER.  
7 Press FGD E to select a scene to modify, then press ENTER.  
8 Perform steps 5 10 in ACreate Play ListB (A pg. 61).  
6 Press o to stop playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
NAVIGATION ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
62  
Delete Play List  
Edit Library Information  
1 Press EDIT. The Editing screen appears.  
2 (DVD deck only) Press FGD E to select AMODIFYB under  
AORIGINAL/PLAY LISTB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press FGD E to select ADELETEB under APLAY LISTB, then  
press ENTER.  
Title information can be registered in the unit’s memory for up to  
600 DVD discs, 2,000 titles. It is helpful when finding a desired title  
(or play list) by sorting according to the sort options registered  
during (or after) recording.  
4 Press FGD E to select one play list you want to delete, then  
press ENTER.  
5 Press D E to select ADELETEB, then press ENTER.  
When you cancel the deletion, select ACANCELB, then press  
ENTER.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press HDD or DVD to choose the corresponding deck.  
6 Press EDIT to return to the normal screen.  
CABLE/SAT  
NOTE:  
TV  
DVD  
Even if a play list is deleted, the titles recorded and the library  
information are not affected at all.  
HDD  
DVD  
Modify Index  
A Perform steps 1 4 of AEdit ScenesB (A pg. 61) before  
continuing.  
B Perform steps 5 8 of AModify IndexB (A pg. 58).  
Modify Play List Name  
A Perform steps 1 4 of AEdit ScenesB (A pg. 61) before  
continuing.  
NAVIGATION  
ENTER  
rtwe  
B Perform steps 2 5 of AModify Title NameB (A pg. 58).  
Modify Category  
A Perform steps 1 4 of AEdit ScenesB (A pg. 61) before  
continuing.  
B Perform steps 2 4 of AModify CategoryB (A pg. 59).  
Scan For Title From Library  
1 Press NAVIGATION. The Library Database Navigation screen  
appears.  
2 Press FGD E to select the  
NAVIGATION  
appropriate sort button to sort  
DVD NAVIGATION  
the information, then press  
ORIGINAL  
PLAY LIST  
ENTER.  
ADATEB:  
SELECT WITH @  
THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [NAVIGATION]  
TO EXIT  
DVD LIBRARY  
Sort by date  
ADISC No.B:  
Sort by disc number  
ACATEGORYB:  
Sort by category  
ANAMEB:  
DATE  
DISC No.  
NAME  
ENTER  
NAVIGATION  
EXIT  
CATEGORY  
A
SELECT  
Sort by name  
ADATEB and ADISC No.B are available for the DVD deck only.  
3 Press FGD E to select the desired title, then press ENTER.  
Playback begins automatically after the selected title is located.  
NOTE:  
If a disc registered in the library is recorded or modified on DVD  
units from other manufacturers, it may become impossible to  
operate properly.  
Register Disc  
When a disc that is not registered in the library is loaded, a  
message appears confirming if the disc should be registered. If  
registering, perform the following procedure.  
1 Press D E to select AREGISTERB, then press ENTER to confirm  
the registration.  
2 Press NAVIGATION to return to the normal screen.  
NOTES:  
It is not possible to register discs formatted on devices other than  
JVC’s DVD recorders.  
It is not possible to register discs recorded on devices other than  
JVC’s DVD recorders.  
It is not possible to register discs when ASAVE AS LIBRARYB is  
set to AOFFB. (A pg. 79)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NAVIGATION ON HDD/DVD DECK  
EN  
63  
Locating The Desired Group And Tracks  
Playback With MP3/WMA/JPEG  
Navigation  
1 Load a disc.  
2 Press NAVIGATION.  
3 Press FGD E to select AORIGINALB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press F G to select the  
NAVIGATION > ORIGINAL  
desired group, then press  
GROUP  
:
001/100  
TRACK  
:
001/100  
0 : 07 : 01  
This unit can play back discs that MP3/WMA sound files and JPEG  
image files taken with digital still cameras or other devices are  
recorded.  
The MP3/WMA/JPEG Navigation enables you to search and select  
the desired files recorded on CD-R/RW or CD-ROM discs very  
easily.  
ENTER.  
A list of files in the selected  
group appears.  
IT’S SHOWTIME ! ! /B’z  
ROOT  
001. IT’S SHOWTIME ! ! /B’z  
CLASSIC  
002. ONLY FLOWER IN THE WORLD/SMAP  
003. SEXY GUY/GOMAKI  
CLUB  
DANCE  
004. HEY?/AYAYA  
EUROPE  
005. DOOR TO TOMORROW/I WISH  
006. REASON/ASAMI  
FOREIGN GROUP  
FOREIGN ROCK  
007. DIE ANOTHER DAY/JAMES BOND  
5 Press F G to select the  
desired item, then press  
ENTER. The unit starts  
playback from the selected  
item.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Press DVD to select the DVD deck.  
NAVIGATION > ORIGINAL  
GROUP  
:
001/100  
TRACK  
:
001/100  
0 : 07 : 01  
IT’S SHOWTIME ! ! /B’z  
ROOT  
001. IT’S SHOWTIME ! ! /B’z  
CLASSIC  
002. ONLY FLOWER IN THE WORLD/SMAP  
003. SEXY GUY/GOMAKI  
CLUB  
DANCE  
004. HEY?/AYAYA  
The unit stops when all items  
played back.  
EUROPE  
005. DOOR TO TOMORROW/I WISH  
006. REASON/ASAMI  
FOREIGN GROUP  
FOREIGN ROCK  
007. DIE ANOTHER DAY/JAMES BOND  
NAVIGATION > ORIGINAL  
GROUP  
:
001/100  
TRACK  
:
001/100  
0 : 07 : 01  
NOTES:  
IT’S SHOWTIME ! ! /B’z  
ROOT  
001. IT’S SHOWTIME ! ! /B’z  
If you press SELECT(I) instead of ENTER in step 4, the unit  
starts playback from the first file of the group.  
CLASSIC  
002. ONLY FLOWER IN THE WORLD/SMAP  
003. SEXY GUY/GOMAKI  
CLUB  
DANCE  
004. HEY?/AYAYA  
JPEG files are played back as a slide show at the set intervals.  
(A pg. 32)  
EUROPE  
005. DOOR TO TOMORROW/I WISH  
006. REASON/ASAMI  
FOREIGN GROUP  
FOREIGN ROCK  
007. DIE ANOTHER DAY/JAMES BOND  
If a file name includes any 2-byte character, the unit may not  
show the file name correctly.  
The order of the groups and items shown in steps 4 and 5 may  
differ from the order shown on your PC.  
A Selected group number/total number of groups on the disc  
B Selected file number/total number of files in the group that  
contains the selected file  
C Elapsed time (MP3 only)  
D Name of the selected file  
E Group name  
F Selected file  
NOTES:  
If there are more than 100 files, the rest of the files are not  
displayed. In this case, press ON SCREEN to display them on  
the TV screen.  
If both MP3 files and WMA files are recorded on the same disc,  
WMA files cannot be played back as they are not displayed on  
the navigation screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
EDITING  
EN  
64  
5 Press FGD E to select indexes (small pictures) of desired  
original recordings and/or play lists, then press MARK. After  
selecting all indexes you want to dub, press ENTER.  
You can select up to 8 original recordings and/or play lists.  
The recordable time of the disc is displayed on the bar meter.  
For details, refer to AAbout Disc Remaining DisplayB (A pg. 67)  
Dubbing  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
6 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER to start  
dubbing.  
CABLE/SAT  
NOTES:  
TV  
DVD  
Play lists are dubbed as programmes.  
HDD  
VHS  
In Video mode, if the selected play list includes the scenes  
recorded in the different transfer rate, the dubbing is performed in  
the highest transfer rate of the scenes in the selected play list.  
During dubbing, it is not possible to play back on HDD or DVD, or  
to set timer programming.  
DVD  
MARK  
DUBBING  
ENTER  
Just Dubbing (From HDD To DVD)  
By using Just Dubbing function, when dubbing all selected original  
recordings and/or play lists, the unit automatically sets the  
appropriate recording mode depending on the combination of the  
total time of the selected recordings and/or play lists to be dubbed  
and the available disc space.  
rtwe  
4
1 Load a recordable disc.  
7
8
9
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AHDDNDVDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select AJUSTB, then press ENTER.  
ON SCREEN  
5
Perform steps  
5
6
of AHigh Speed Dubbing (From HDD To DVD)B.  
AUDIO  
NOTES:  
Play lists are dubbed as programmes.  
NOTES:  
recorded in the different transfer rate, the dubbing is performed in  
the highest transfer rate of the scenes in the selected play list.  
However, the lower transfer rate cannot be dubbed in the higher  
transfer rate.  
The recordable time of the disc is displayed on the bar meter. For  
details, refer to AAbout Disc Remaining DisplayB (A pg. 67)  
During dubbing, it is not possible to play back on HDD or DVD, or  
to set timer programming.  
It is not possible to dub simultaneously when timer programming  
is set. Select either dubbing or timer programming.  
The order of the index which are displayed by pressing  
DUBBING differs from the images displayed by pressing  
NAVIGATION or EDIT.  
When dubbing from VHS, SQPB (S-VHS QUASI PLAYBACK) is  
activated, and the original S-VHS resolution cannot be obtained.  
When dubbing from HDD or DVD to VHS, the colour system of  
the VHS deck must be set in accordance to the signal to be  
recorded. (A pg. 82) When dubbing from VHS to HDD or DVD,  
the colour system of both the VHS deck (playback) and HDD or  
DVD deck (recording) must be set. (A pg. 79, 82)  
Manual Dubbing (From HDD To DVD)  
It is possible to perform dubbing in the desired transfer rate.  
1 Load a recordable disc.  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AHDDNDVDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select AMANUALB, then press ENTER.  
High Speed Dubbing (From HDD To DVD)  
It is possible to dub the original recordings and/or play lists on the  
HDD deck to DVD discs. The dubbing is performed in high speed,  
keeping the original transfer rate.  
5 Perform step 5 of AHigh Speed Dubbing (From HDD To DVD)B.  
The Manual Dubbing screen appears.  
NOTES:  
6 Press F G to select AREC MODEB, then press ENTER. Press  
After accessing the Dubbing Menu screen, it is not possible to  
take out a disc.  
F G to select the desired option, then press ENTER.  
It is not possible to dub copy-once titles in Video mode.  
When dubbing a copy-once title, the data will be moved from  
HDD to DVD upon completing dubbing.  
When you cancel dubbing a copy-once title during dubbing, the  
original recording on the HDD deck remains and the title copied  
to a DVD disc is deleted.  
It is not possible to dub play lists which contain copy-once titles.  
It is not possible to dub the following programmes to DVD-R/RW  
disc (Video mode):  
which contains more than one audio language.  
which is on the play list.  
7 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER.  
8 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER to start  
dubbing.  
NOTES:  
recorded in the different transfer rate, the dubbing is performed in  
the highest transfer rate of the scenes in the selected play list.  
However, the lower transfer rate cannot be dubbed in the higher  
transfer rate.  
The recordable time of the disc is displayed on the bar meter. For  
details, refer to AAbout Disc Remaining DisplayB (A pg. 67)  
During dubbing, it is not possible to play back on HDD or DVD, or  
to set timer programming.  
which is edited (also RetroActive Recording).  
which is recorded in LP mode or FP155-FP240 mode.  
Recording may not be performed in the highest speed depending  
on the characteristics of the disc used.  
1 Load a recordable disc.  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AHDDNDVDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select AHIGH SPEEDB, then press ENTER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
EDITING  
EN  
65  
Dubbing From HDD To VHS  
It is possible to perform dubbing from the HDD deck to the VHS  
deck.  
Dubbing From DVD To VHS  
It is possible to perform dubbing from the DVD deck to the VHS  
deck.  
1 Load a cassette with the record safety tab intact.  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AHDDNVHSB, then press ENTER.  
1 Load the disc you want to dub onto the DVD deck, and a  
cassette with the record safety tab intact to the VHS deck.  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select ADVDNVHSB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select indexes (small pictures) of desired  
original recordings and/or play lists, then press MARK. After  
selecting all indexes you want to dub, press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select indexes (small pictures) of desired  
original recordings and/or play lists, then press MARK. After  
selecting all indexes you want to dub, press ENTER.  
You can select up to 8 original recordings and/or play lists.  
You can select up to 8 original recordings and/or play lists.  
5 Press F G to select ASELECT REC. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
5 Press F G to select ASELECT REC. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER. The confirmation screen appears.  
6 Press F G to select ASELECT SND. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
6 Press F G to select ASELECT SND. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
7 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER. The  
confirmation screen appears.  
7 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER. The  
confirmation screen appears.  
8 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
The current display on the screen will be switched to a receiving  
broadcast display.  
8 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
The current display on the screen will be switched to a receiving  
broadcast display.  
9 Press I to locate the point from where you want to start  
dubbing, then press R and W simultaneously so that the VHS  
deck enters the record pause mode.  
9 Press I to locate the point from where you want to start  
dubbing, then press R and W simultaneously so that the VHS  
deck enters the record pause mode.  
10Press HDD so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
The dubbing screen will appear.  
10Press DVD so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
The dubbing screen will appear.  
11Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER for  
confirmation.  
11Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER to  
confirm.  
To cancel the dubbing, press the o then D E to select  
To cancel the dubbing, press o then D E to select ACANCELB  
and press ENTER to confirm.  
ACANCELB and press ENTER to confirm.  
12Upon completing dubbing, the tape stops and ADUBBING  
COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen. Press ENTER to  
end.  
12Upon completing dubbing, the tape stops and ADUBBING  
COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen. Press ENTER to  
end.  
Original Dubbing (From DVD To HDD)  
It is possible to dub the original recordings on DVD discs to the  
HDD deck.  
NOTES:  
It is not possible to dub play lists on DVD discs.  
It is not possible to dub Video CDs/SVCDs or Audio CDs.  
When dubbing is in progress, only o is functional.  
1 Load a disc you want to dub.  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select ADVDNHDDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select indexes (small pictures) of desired  
original recordings and/or play lists, then press MARK. After  
selecting all indexes you want to dub, press ENTER.  
You can select up to 8 original recordings and/or play lists.  
5 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER to start  
dubbing.  
NOTES:  
It is not possible to dub play lists on DVD discs.  
It is not possible to dub pre-recorded DVD VIDEO discs.  
It is not possible to dub Video CDs/SVCDs or Audio CDs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EDITING  
EN  
66  
11Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER for  
confirmation.  
Dubbing From VHS To HDD  
(Dubbing An Entire Cassette)  
It is possible to perform automatic dubbing of all the recorded  
programmes of a cassette from the VHS deck to the HDD deck  
using the AENTIREB dubbing.  
To cancel the dubbing, press o then D E to select ACANCELB  
and press ENTER to confirm.  
12Upon completing dubbing, the tape stops and ADUBBING  
COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen. Press ENTER to  
end.  
1 Load the cassette you want to dub.  
Set APICTURE CONTROLB to AEDITB. (A pg. 81)  
NOTES:  
AO.S.D.B is automatically set to AOFFB. It will return to AAUTOB  
after dubbing is completed.  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AVHSNHDDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select AENTIREB, then press ENTER.  
The programme information at the VHS deck will not be dubbed.  
When there are blanks on the tape of more than 2 seconds, the  
HDD deck will enter into pause mode. Dubbing will resume once  
recorded portion is detected.  
Dubbing copyright guarded tape is not possible.  
When you select AEDITB to dub tapes in step 1, be sure to select  
ANORMB after you finish dubbing the tapes.  
5 Press F G to select ASELECT REC. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
6 Press F G to select ASELECT SND. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
When dubbing is in progress, only o is functional.  
7 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER. The  
Dubbing From VHS To DVD  
(Dubbing An Entire Cassette)  
It is possible to perform automatic dubbing of all the recorded  
programmes of a cassette from the VHS deck to the DVD deck  
using the AENTIREB dubbing.  
confirmation screen appears.  
8 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER for  
confirmation.  
Once dubbing starts, it will continue dubbing until the end of the  
tape is reached.  
To cancel the dubbing, press o then D E to select ACANCELB  
and press ENTER to confirm.  
If the tape is not rewind, the unit will start dubbing after  
automatically rewinding the tape to the beginning.  
1 Load the cassette you want to dub.  
Set APICTURE CONTROLB to AEDITB. (A pg. 81)  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AVHSNDVDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select AENTIREB, then press ENTER.  
9 Upon completing dubbing, the tape stops and ADUBBING  
COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen. Press ENTER to  
end.  
5 Press F G to select ASELECT REC. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
The tape will automatically be rewound.  
NOTES:  
AO.S.D.B is automatically set to AOFFB. It will return to AAUTOB  
after dubbing is completed.  
6 Press F G to select ASELECT SND. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
The programme information at the VHS deck will not be dubbed.  
When there are blanks on the tape of more than 2 seconds, the  
HDD deck will enter into pause mode. Dubbing will resume once  
recorded portion is detected.  
7 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER. The  
confirmation screen appears.  
Dubbing copyright guarded tape is not possible.  
When you select AEDITB to dub tapes in step 1, be sure to select  
ANORMB after you finish dubbing the tapes.  
8 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER for  
confirmation.  
Once dubbing starts, it will continue dubbing until the end of the  
tape is reached.  
When dubbing is in progress, only o is functional.  
To cancel the dubbing, press o then D E to select ACANCELB  
and press ENTER to confirm.  
If the tape is not rewind, the unit will start dubbing after  
automatically rewinding the tape to the beginning.  
Dubbing From VHS To HDD  
(Dubbing A Programme From Cassette)  
It is possible to dub a single title (programme) of a cassette from  
the VHS deck to the HDD deck using the A1 PROG.B dubbing.  
9 Upon completing dubbing, the tape stops and ADUBBING  
COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen. Press ENTER to  
end.  
1 Load the cassette you want to dub.  
The tape will automatically be rewound.  
Set APICTURE CONTROLB to AEDITB. (A pg. 81)  
NOTES:  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AVHSNHDDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select A1 PROG.B, then press ENTER.  
AO.S.D.B is automatically set to AOFFB. It will return to AAUTOB  
after dubbing is completed.  
The programme information at the VHS deck will not be dubbed.  
When there are blanks on the tape of more than 2 seconds, the  
DVD deck will enter into pause mode. Dubbing will resume once  
recorded portion is detected.  
5 Press F G to select ASELECT REC. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
Dubbing copyright guarded tape is not possible.  
When you select AEDITB to dub tapes in step 1, be sure to select  
ANORMB after you finish dubbing the tapes.  
6 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER. The  
confirmation screen appears.  
7 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
The current display on the screen will be switched to a receiving  
broadcast display.  
When dubbing is in progress, only o is functional.  
8 Press AUDIO to select the playback sound.  
9 Press I to locate the point from where you want to start  
dubbing, then press W.  
VHS deck enters the record pause mode.  
10Press HDD so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
The current display on the screen will be switched to the  
dubbing screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
EDITING  
EN  
67  
About Disc Remaining Display  
When dubbing from HDD to DVD, the unit displays the time  
information for dubbing by bar meter. By comparing the disc  
remaining time and the necessary time for dubbing of the selected  
items, it is possible to check if the dubbing can be performed  
completely or not.  
Dubbing From VHS To DVD  
(Dubbing A Programme From Cassette)  
It is possible to dub a single title (programme) of a cassette from  
the VHS deck to the DVD deck using the A1 PROG.B dubbing.  
1 Load the cassette you want to dub.  
When performing the High Speed Dubbing  
Set APICTURE CONTROLB to AEDITB. (A pg. 81)  
2 Press DUBBING to access the Dubbing Menu screen.  
3 Press FGD E to select AVHSNDVDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select A1 PROG.B, then press ENTER.  
Capacity of a disc  
Remaining capacity  
21%  
5 Press F G to select ASELECT REC. MODEB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G to select the desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
Dark green: Length of already recorded item  
Light green: Length of selected item  
Yellow: Length of the item now being selected by arrow  
Red: Excess over the capacity  
6 Press G to select ACONFIRMB, then press ENTER. The  
confirmation screen appears.  
7 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
The current display on the screen will be switched to a receiving  
broadcast display.  
When performing the Just Dubbing  
TOTAL 105MIN  
8 Press AUDIO to select the playback sound.  
The unit displays the status on the assumption that the selected  
items are dubbed in the lowest transfer rate.  
The total time of a loaded disc is displayed on the right of the bar  
meter.  
9 Press I to locate the point from where you want to start  
dubbing, then press W.  
VHS deck enters the record pause mode.  
10Press DVD so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
The current display on the screen will be switched to the  
dubbing screen.  
When performing the Manual Dubbing  
11Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER for  
MAX FR240  
confirmation.  
To cancel the dubbing, press o then D E to select ACANCELB  
and press ENTER to confirm.  
The unit displays the status on the assumption that the selected  
items are dubbed in the lowest transfer rate.  
The available highest transfer rate is displayed on the right of the  
bar meter.  
12Upon completing dubbing, the tape stops and ADUBBING  
COMPLETEDB appears on the TV screen. Press ENTER to  
end.  
NOTE:  
The bar meter moves up and down regularly, but this is not a  
malfunction.  
NOTES:  
AO.S.D.B is automatically set to AOFFB. It will return to AAUTOB  
after dubbing is completed.  
The programme information at the VHS deck will not be dubbed.  
Dubbing copyright guarded tape is not possible.  
When you select AEDITB to dub tapes in step 1, be sure to select  
ANORMB after you finish dubbing the tapes.  
When dubbing is in progress, only o is functional.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EDITING  
EN  
68  
The following on-screen display for DV dubbing appears when  
ON SCREEN is pressed while the channel has been set to ADVB.  
DV Dubbing (HDD & DVD Deck Only)  
0:00  
FR360 00:00:00. 00  
12bit  
DV JVC  
1:00  
2:00  
GR-DV3500  
00:00:00. 00  
DV  
HDD  
You can dub programmes from a camcorder or DV equipment  
connected to the unit with a DV cable. The unit’s remote control  
allows you the limited control of the connected camcorder or DV  
equipment functions during dubbing.  
L
R
GR-DV3500  
SOUND1  
NOTES:  
1
2
DV  
DV  
Use the DV cable VC-VDV 204U for connection.  
When you connect a PC to the [DV IN] connector, we do not  
assure the normal operation of this unit.  
A
B
C
A Remote control switch  
To switch between the devices operable by the remote control  
unit. The unit is operable when the remote icon (  
Your unit  
)
displayed faces to the left, while the DV device is operable  
when the remote icon is facing to the right.  
Select to start or pause the dubbing. If ENTER is pressed when  
the DV device is in the pause condition, preroll editing* where it  
is possible to dub with a start time that is highly accurate will be  
activated. When the DV device cannot be operated from the  
unit (such as in camera mode), proceed with normal recording  
(A pg. 34, 37).  
To [DV IN]  
* Preroll editing refers to the playback after the DV tape is slightly  
rewind. (For DV devices that do not support the –1x speed, the  
rewinding time may be longer.)  
C Sound monitor switch  
Camcorder  
DV cable  
For selecting the desired sound format for dubbing.  
(VC-VDV 204U)  
(not supplied)  
1 Connect a camcorder or DV equipment to the [DV IN]  
connector on the unit’s front panel.  
2 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or HDD  
on the remote so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
3 Press PR +/– to set the channel to ADVB.  
4 Press ON SCREEN.  
DV connector  
The on-screen display for DV dubbing appears.  
5 Press D E to select  
, then press ENTER to display  
DV equipment  
the remote icon (facing to the right) for the DV equipment.  
6 Press REC MODE repeatedly to set the recording mode.  
7 Locate the point from where you want to start dubbing, then  
stop or pause playback by pressing the following buttons on the  
remote control: I, N, O, o, W.  
To play back in slow speed (1/10 of the normal speed), press W  
to pause playback, then press O or N.  
To play back frame-by-frame, press W to pause playback, then  
press W repeatedly. Each press of W advances a frame.  
To change the playback direction, press O or N.  
8 Press D E to select  
, then press ENTER repeatedly  
until the desired sound track appears on the TV screen.  
SOUND 1:  
Select this to record the original stereo sound played back on  
the connected DV equipment.  
SOUND 2:  
Select this to record the dubbed stereo sound played back on  
the connected DV equipment.  
MIX:  
Select this to record the sound of both ASOUND 1B and  
ASOUND 2B.  
Note that this selection is not available when the source  
programme is recorded in 16BIT (48 kHz) mode.  
9 Press D E to select  
, then press ENTER. The  
dubbing starts.  
Playback on the external DV equipment and recording on the  
unit should start simultaneously.  
To pause dubbing, press D E to select  
, then press  
ENTER. Both the unit and the external DV equipment pause  
dubbing. Pressing W on the unit also works the same way.  
10Press D E to select  
press o. The DV equipment stops.  
11Press D E to select , then press ENTER.  
, then press ENTER. Then  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
EDITING  
EN  
69  
12Press o twice on the remote control to stop dubbing.  
Both the unit and the external DV equipment stop dubbing.  
NOTES:  
Dubbing copyright guarded programmes is not possible.  
Original DV information such as the recording date and time are  
not recorded.  
The superimposed indication during the operation or dubbing is  
not recorded.  
If the dubbing is paused while the channel is set to ADVB, you  
cannot switch channels.  
When you dub from DV equipment other than a  
camcorder  
A Perform step 1 to 4.  
B Locate the point from where you want to start dubbing,  
then stop on the DV equipment.  
If you pause the DV equipment in this step, a few  
second’s still picture will be recorded at the beginning of  
the recorded programme.  
C
Set the input mode to ADV INPUTB on the DV equipment.  
If you select an input mode other than ADV INPUTB,  
unwanted pictures may be recorded at the beginning of  
the recorded programme.  
D Perform step 9 to 12.  
To skip unwanted part of the source picture  
Press ENTER to stop both equipment, then press D E to select  
.
Locate the point where you want to restart dubbing by pressing I,  
N, or O, then press o.  
Press D E to select  
dubbing.  
, then press ENTER to restart  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EDITING  
EN  
70  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Edit From A Camcorder  
1 Make connections.  
You can use a camcorder as the source player and your unit as the  
recording deck.  
A If the camcorder has no S-VIDEO output connector:  
^ connect the camcorder’s AUDIO/VIDEO OUT connectors to  
the unit’s [VIDEO/AUDIO ((MONO) L/R)] input connectors  
on the front panel.  
A If the camcorder has no S-VIDEO output connector:  
When using a monaural camcorder, connect its AUDIO OUT  
connector to the [AUDIO-L] input connector on your unit.  
B If the camcorder has an S-VIDEO output connector: (HDD &  
DVD deck only)  
^ connect the camcorder’s AUDIO OUT and S-VIDEO OUT  
connectors to the unit’s [AUDIO] and [S-VIDEO] input  
connectors on the front panel.  
Recorder  
To [VIDEO/AUDIO  
((MONO) L/R)] input  
2 Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly to select  
the recording deck.  
Audio/video cable  
(not supplied)  
3 Press PR +/– to select AF-1B.  
Set AF-1 INPUTB to AVIDEOB for the [AUDIO] input connector, or  
AS-VIDEOB for the [S-VIDEO] input connector, depending on  
the connector being used. (A pg. 73)  
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to set the recording mode.  
5 Start playback on the camcorder slightly before the actual point  
Player  
from where you wish to start dubbing.  
6 Press R on the unit to start recording. Or while holding R, press  
I on the remote control. The dubbing starts.  
AUDIO/VIDEO OUT  
7 Press o on the unit, then stop playback on the camcorder.  
NOTES:  
All necessary cables can be obtained from your dealer.  
Refer to the camcorder’s instruction manual for operating  
procedure.  
The quality of dubbed picture becomes poorer than that of the  
original.  
B If the camcorder has an S-VIDEO output connector (HDD  
& DVD deck only):  
To [S-VIDEO]  
input  
To [AUDIO] input  
Recorder  
Audio cable  
(not  
supplied)  
S-video cable  
(not supplied)  
S-VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
Player  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
EDITING  
EN  
71  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Edit To Or From Another Recorder  
1 Connect another recorder’s 21-pin SCART connector to the  
unit’s 21-pin SCART connector as illustrated.  
A When using your unit as the source player:  
^ connect its [L-1 IN/OUT] connector to the recording deck.  
B When using your unit as the recording deck:  
^ connect its [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector to the source  
player.  
If another recorder is compatible with the Y/C signal: (HDD &  
DVD deck only)  
You can use your unit as the source player or as the recording  
deck.  
NOTE:  
When using another recorder as the recording deck, refer to its  
instruction manual.  
A When using your unit as the source player  
^ when using your unit as the source player, set AL-1  
OUTPUTB to ASCART S-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
^ when using your unit as the recording deck, set AL-2  
SELECTB to AS-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
Player  
TV receiver  
Your unit  
2 When using this unit as the recording deck, press VHS/HDD/  
DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly to select the recording  
deck.  
21-pin SCART cable  
(supplied)  
3 When using this unit as the recording deck, press PR +/– to  
select AL-2B.  
21-pin SCART cable  
(not supplied)  
For HDD/DVD deck  
Set AL-2 SELECTB to AVIDEOB or AS-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
4 When using this unit as the recording deck, press REC MODE  
repeatedly to set the recording mode.  
Another recorder  
5 Engage the Play mode of the source player.  
6 Engage the Record mode of the recording deck.  
Recorder  
7 Stop recording on the recording deck, then stop playback on  
the source player.  
NOTES:  
All necessary cables can be obtained from your dealer.  
For Y/C signal input/output, be sure to use a 21-pin SCART cable  
that is compatible with the Y/C signal.  
When you use this unit as the source player for editing, be sure to  
set ASUPERIMPOSEB or AO.S.D.B to AOFFB before starting.  
(A pg. 80, 81) If you are using another recorder with S-Video  
and Audio output connectors, connect its S-Video and Audio  
output connectors to this unit’s [S-VIDEO] and [AUDIO] input  
connectors on the front panel. Then, set the unit’s input mode to  
AF-1B in step 3, and set AF-1 INPUTB to AS-VIDEOB. (A pg. 73)  
B When using your unit as the recording deck  
TV receiver  
Recorder  
Your unit  
21-pin SCART  
cable (supplied)  
21-pin SCART cable  
(not supplied)  
Another recorder  
Player  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
EDITING  
EN  
72  
SCART RGB:  
If a connected appliance’s input is compatible with RGB  
signals, set to ASCART RGBB. You can obtain a high-quality  
RGB picture.  
Output/Input Set  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
COMPONENT:  
If a connected appliance’s input is compatible with Y/PB/PR  
signals, set to ACOMPONENTB. You can obtain a high-quality  
Y/PB/PR picture. Switch the TV to the input that you can watch  
component video pictures.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
8 L-1 INPUT ^ VIDEO / S-VIDEO  
VIDEO:  
If a connected appliance’s output is compatible only with  
regular video signals, set to AVIDEOB.  
S-VIDEO:  
If a connected appliance’s output is compatible with Y/C  
signals, set to AS-VIDEOB. You can obtain a high-quality picture.  
(For connection, be sure to use a 21-pin SCART cable that is  
compatible with the Y/C signal.)  
ENTER  
rtwe  
NOTES:  
If AL-1 OUTPUTB is set to ASCART S-VIDEOB or ASCART RGBB, it  
is not possible to set AL-1 INPUTB to AS-VIDEOB.  
If AL-2 SELECTB is set to ASAT S-VIDEOB or ADECODERB, it is  
not possible to set AL-1 INPUTB to AS-VIDEOB.  
If AL-2 SELECTB is set to ADECODERB, it is only possible to set  
AL-1 OUTPUTB to ASCART VIDEOB.  
SET UP  
Component video signals are not output from the [L-1 IN/OUT]  
connector.  
When Progressive scan mode is engaged, it is not possible to  
select the setting of AL-1 OUTPUTB. (A pg. 72)  
L-2 Select Setting  
L-1 Output And L-1 Input Setting  
The [L-1 IN/OUT] connector accepts and delivers either a composite  
signal (regular video signal) or a Y/C signal (a signal in which the  
Set AL-2 SELECTB to the appropriate mode depending on the type  
of appliance connected to the unit’s [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector.  
1 Perform steps 1 and 2 of AL-1 Output And L-1 Input SettingB on  
luminance and chrominance signals are separated). Set  
AL-1  
the left column.  
OUTPUT and L-1 INPUT to the appropriate mode depending on  
B
A
B
the type of appliance connected to the unit’s [L-1 IN/OUT] connector.  
1 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
2 Press D E to select AFUNCTION SET UPB, then press G.  
3 Press D E to select AVIDEO  
2 Press F G to select AL-2 SELECTB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press F G to select the  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
appropriate setting, then press  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
DISPLAY SET  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
ENTER.  
MONITOR TYPE  
4:3LB  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
F-1 INPUT  
L-1 OUTPUT  
L-1 INPUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
4 Press SET UP to complete the  
IN/OUTB, then press G.  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
DISPLAY SET  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
setting.  
SCART VIDEO  
VIDEO  
MONITOR TYPE  
4:3LB  
VIDEO  
4 Press F G to select AL-1  
OUTPUTB or AL-1 INPUTB,  
then press ENTER.  
S-VIDEO  
L-2 SELECT  
F-1 INPUT  
L-1 OUTPUT  
L-1 INPUT  
L-2 SELECT  
V
SAT VIDEO  
SAT S-VIDEO  
DECODER  
SCART VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRES [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
VIDEO  
SET UP  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
* The boldface settings below indicate the settings at your purchase.  
SELECT  
5 Press F G to select the  
appropriate setting, then press  
ENTER.  
8 L-2 SELECT ^ VIDEO / S-VIDEO / SAT VIDEO / SAT S-VIDEO /  
DECODER  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
REC/PLAY SET UP DISPLAY SET  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
INITIAL SET UP  
Select AVIDEOB or AS-VIDEOB to use this unit as the recording deck  
with the player connected to the [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector, or  
to use the satellite receiver connected to the [L-2 IN/DECODER]  
connector.  
MONITOR TYPE  
4:3LB  
VIDEO  
F-1 INPUT  
6 Press SET UP to complete the  
L-1 OUTPUT  
L-1 INPUT  
SCARTVIDEO  
setting.  
SCART S-VIDEO  
SCART RGB  
\
COMPONENT  
L-2 SELECT  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
VIDEO:  
If a connected appliance’s output is compatible only with  
regular video signals, set to AVIDEOB.  
* The boldface settings below indicate the settings at your purchase.  
S-VIDEO:  
If a connected appliance’s output is compatible with Y/C  
signals, set to AS-VIDEOB. You can obtain high-quality picture.  
(For connection, be sure to use a 21-pin SCART cable that is  
compatible with the Y/C signal.)  
8 L-1 OUTPUT ^ SCART VIDEO / SCART S-VIDEO / SCART  
RGB / COMPONENT  
SCART VIDEO:  
If a connected appliance’s input is compatible only with regular  
video signals, set to ASCART VIDEOB.  
Select ASAT VIDEOB or ASAT S-VIDEOB to view a satellite  
programme with the TV set while the unit is turned off. (A pg. 76)  
SCART S-VIDEO:  
If a connected appliance’s input is compatible with Y/C signals,  
set to ASCART S-VIDEOB. You can obtain high-quality picture.  
(For connection, be sure to use a 21-pin SCART cable that is  
compatible with the Y/C signal.)  
SAT VIDEO:  
If a connected satellite receiver’s output is compatible only with  
regular video signals, set to ASAT VIDEOB.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
EDITING  
EN  
73  
SAT S-VIDEO:  
If a connected satellite receiver’s output is compatible with Y/C  
signals, set to ASAT S-VIDEOB. You can obtain a high-quality  
S-VHS picture. (For connection, be sure to use a 21-pin  
SCART cable that is compatible with the Y/C signal.)  
Digital Audio Dubbing  
You can dub selected audio from a DVD or Audio CD disc to a  
digital audio device.  
However, it is not possible to dub copy-protected discs.  
DECODER:  
To use a decoder connected to the [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
NOTES:  
If you have a satellite receiver or a decoder connected to the [L-2  
IN/DECODER] connector, be sure to set AL-2 SELECTB back to  
appropriate mode after editing.  
Example: Dubbing to an MD  
Recorder  
If you are not connecting a satellite receiver or a decoder to the  
[L-2 IN/DECODER] connector, leave AL-2 SELECTB set to  
AVIDEOB.  
When AL-2 SELECTB is set to ASAT VIDEOB and ASAT S-VIDEOB,  
ASATB appears on the TV screen or front display panel instead of  
AL-2B.  
If AL-1 OUTPUTB is set to ASCART S-VIDEOB, it is not possible to  
set AL-2 SELECTB to ADECODERB or ASAT VIDEOB.  
If AL-1 OUTPUTB is set to ASCART RGBB, it is not possible to set  
AL-2 SELECTB to ADECODERB or ASAT S-VIDEOB.  
If AL-1 OUTPUTB is set to ACOMPONENTB and AL-2 SELECTB to  
ASAT VIDEOB, ASAT S-VIDEOB or ADECODERB, be sure to  
connect the [L-1 IN/OUT] connector with a TV.  
If AL-2 SELECTB is set to ASAT S-VIDEOB, be sure to set AL-1  
OUTPUTB to ASCART S-VIDEOB.  
Digital audio device  
(MD deck, etc.)  
Coaxial cable  
(not supplied)  
Optical cable  
(not supplied)  
To [DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
(COAXIAL)]  
To [DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
(OPTICAL)]  
F-1 Input Setting  
Set AF-1 INPUTB to the appropriate mode depending on the  
Player  
connector (VIDEO or S-VIDEO) being used on the front panel.  
1 Perform steps 1 and 2 of AL-1 Output And L-1 Input SettingB  
(A pg. 72).  
2 Press F G to select AF-1 INPUTB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press F G to select the  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
Rear of unit  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
appropriate setting, then press  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
DISPLAY SET  
ENTER.  
MONITOR TYPE  
4:3LB  
F-1 INPUT  
L-1 OUTPUT  
L-1 INPUT  
L-2 SELECT  
VIDEO  
V
4 Press SET UP to complete the  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
setting.  
SCART VIDEO  
VIDEO  
Note for connection:  
Remove the protection cap from the optical cable.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
* The boldface settings below indicate the settings at your purchase.  
1 Connect the unit and a digital audio device using either an  
optional optical cable or an optional coaxial cable.  
8 F-1 INPUT ^ VIDEO / S-VIDEO  
2 Place a disc on the unit and load an MD on the connected  
VIDEO:  
digital audio device.  
When connecting an appliance to the [VIDEO] input connector,  
3 Select the audio to be dubbed.  
set to AVIDEOB.  
4 Start playback slightly before the actual point from where you  
S-VIDEO:  
wish to start dubbing.  
When connecting an appliance to the [S-VIDEO] input  
connector, set to AS-VIDEOB.  
5 Press W to pause playback.  
6 Select the input mode on the connected digital audio device.  
7 Press I to start playback on the unit.  
8 Start recording on the digital audio device.  
9 Stop recording on the digital audio device. Then press o to stop  
playback on the unit.  
NOTE:  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between where  
you intend editing to start, and where it actually starts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
REMOTE CONTROL  
EN  
74  
Remote Control Functions  
Remote Control 1/2/3/4 Code Switching  
CABLE/SAT  
TV DVD  
TV AV /VIDEO  
TV  
1
The remote control is capable of controlling four JVC video units  
independently. Each of the units can respond to one of four codes  
(1, 2, 3 or 4). The remote control is preset to send 3 code signals  
because your unit is initially set to respond to 3 code signals. You  
can easily modify your unit to respond to 1, 2 or 4 code signals.  
TV % +/–  
0 – 9  
PR +/–  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
ENTER  
SET UP  
A
I
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
1 – 4  
TV Multi-Brand Remote Control  
Your remote control can operate the basic functions of your TV set.  
In addition to JVC TVs, other manufacturer’s TVs can also be  
controlled.  
ENTER  
Turn off the TV using its remote control.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to TV.  
IMPORTANT:  
Although the provided remote control unit is compatible with JVC  
televisions, as well as many other models, it may not work with  
your TV, or in some instances, may have limited function  
capability.  
o
SET UP  
Keep pressing SET UP down during step 1.  
1 Enter your TV’s brand code using the number keys, then press  
ENTER.  
2 Press A on the unit’s remote control to turn on the TV and try  
operations (A step 3).  
Once you have set the remote control to operate the TV, you do  
not have to repeat this step until you replace your remote  
control’s batteries.  
Some brands of TVs have more than one code. If the TV does  
not function with one code, try entering another.  
Keep pressing SET UP down during step 1.  
1 Press the number key A1B for 1, A2B for 2, A3B for 3 or A4B for 4 to  
change the remote control code, then press ENTER.  
2 Press A on the unit to turn off the unit.  
3 Press I on the unit for over 5 seconds while the unit is turned  
3 Press the corresponding buttons to operate the TV: A, TV AV/  
VIDEO, PR +/–, TV8 +/–, TV d, number keys.  
For some brands of TVs, you must press ENTER after having  
pressed the number keys.  
off. The code currently set appears on the front display panel.  
4 Press o on the remote control to change the unit’s code. The  
code currently set on the remote control blinks on the front  
display panel for approximately 5 seconds, and is applied to the  
unit.  
NOTE:  
When APOWER SAVEB is set to AONB (A pg. 80), it is not possible  
to change the remote code.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
REMOTE CONTROL  
EN  
75  
BRAND NAME  
CODE  
BRAND NAME  
CODE  
JVC  
01, 23, 24, 25  
JVC  
72, 73  
FERGUSON  
FINLUX  
FUNAI  
27  
30  
32  
AMSTRAD  
CANAL +  
D-BOX  
60, 61, 62, 63, 92  
81  
85  
LG/GOLDSTAR  
GRUNDIG  
HITACHI  
ITT  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
18  
19  
10  
28  
03  
29  
20  
31  
ECHOSTAR (VIA DIGITAL)  
FINLUX  
FORCE  
82  
68  
89  
88  
64, 65  
64  
68  
70, 71  
68  
93  
GALAXIS  
GRUNDIG  
HIRSCHMANN  
ITT NOKIA  
KATHREIN  
LUXOR  
MASCOM  
MASPRO  
NOKIA  
PACE  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
RFT  
SAGEM  
NEC  
NOKIA  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
SHARP  
SONY  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
04, 11  
02  
05  
12, 33, 34, 35  
13, 16  
06  
07  
26  
70  
87  
67, 86, 92  
13, 14, 74  
66, 84  
69  
08, 14  
83  
SALORA  
SAMSUNG  
SKYMASTER  
TPS  
TRIAX  
WISI  
68  
05, 24  
69  
83  
91  
Satellite Receiver Multi-Brand Remote Control  
Your remote control can operate the basic functions of your  
satellite receiver set. In addition to JVC satellite receivers, other  
manufacturer’s satellite receivers can also be controlled.  
64  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to CABLE/SAT.  
IMPORTANT:  
Although the provided remote control unit is compatible with JVC  
satellite receivers, as well as many other models, it may not work  
with your satellite receiver, or in some instances, may have limited  
function capability.  
Keep pressing SET UP down during step 1.  
1 Enter your satellite receiver’s brand code using the number  
keys, then press ENTER.  
2 Press A on the unit’s remote control to turn on the satellite  
receiver and try operations (A step 3).  
Once you have set the remote control to operate the satellite  
receiver, you do not have to repeat this step until you replace  
your remote control’s batteries.  
Some brands of satellite receivers have more than one code. If  
the satellite receiver does not function with one code, try  
entering another.  
3 Press the corresponding buttons to operate the satellite  
receiver: A, PR +/–, number keys.  
For some brands of satellite receivers, you must press ENTER  
after having pressed the number keys.  
The number keys may not function with some satellite  
receivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SYSTEM CONNECTIONS  
EN  
76  
Perfect Connections (Recommended)  
This is an example of recommended connections if your TV  
has two 21-pin AV input (SCART) connectors.  
Connect the decoder to the satellite receiver’s connector if you  
have a decoder, [L-1 IN/OUT] connector to TV’s connector, and [L-  
2 IN/DECODER] connector to the satellite receiver’s connector.  
Then connect the satellite receiver and TV.  
Connecting To A Satellite Receiver  
Simple Connections  
This is an example of a simple connection if your TV has one  
21-pin AV input (SCART) connector.  
Connect the satellite receiver to the [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector,  
then connect the [L-1 IN/OUT] connector to the TV’s connector.  
NOTES:  
Set AL-2 SELECTB to AVIDEOB or AS-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
You can use the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
function (A pg. 53) with this connection. (HDD deck only)  
To record a programme via the satellite receiver, select L-2 mode  
by pressing PR +/– so that AL-2B appears on the front display  
panel.  
NOTES:  
Set AL-2 SELECTB to AVIDEOB or AS-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
You can use the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
function (A pg. 53) with this connection. (HDD deck only)  
To record a programme via the satellite receiver, select L-2 mode  
by pressing PR +/– so that AL-2B appears on the front display  
panel.  
To receive a scrambled broadcast, descramble the signal with  
the decoder connected to the satellite receiver.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the satellite receiver  
and decoder.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the satellite  
receiver.  
Outdoor unit  
Satellite cable  
Satellite receiver  
Aerial  
Aerial  
Outdoor unit  
TV aerial cable  
Satellite cable  
TV aerial cable  
ANTENNA IN  
ANTENNA OUT  
Satellite receiver  
ANTENNA IN  
ANTENNA OUT  
TV  
Decoder  
TV  
IMPORTANT  
When you set AL-2 SELECTB to ASAT VIDEOB or ASAT S-VIDEOB  
(A pg. 72), it is possible to view a satellite broadcast with the TV  
set to its AV mode even if the unit is turned off. When the unit is  
in Stop mode or recording, press TV AV/VIDEO on the remote  
control to turn off the VIDEO indicator on the front display panel.  
If you turn on the unit when the satellite receiver’s power is off,  
nothing appears on the TV screen. In this case, turn on the  
satellite receiver, or set the TV to its TV mode, or press TV AV/  
VIDEO on the remote control to set the unit to the AV mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SYSTEM CONNECTIONS  
EN  
77  
When you can’t switch the audio channel of a bilingual  
programme  
Connecting To A Dolby Digital Decoder  
Or An Amplifier With Built-in DTS  
When the unit is connected with a digital audio device using an  
optional optical cable and ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB is set to  
ADOLBY DIGITAL/PCMB, it is not possible to switch the audio  
channel of a bilingual programme recorded on a DVD-RAM or  
DVD-RW (VR mode) disc. In this case, perform the following steps  
using the remote control to switch ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB from  
ADOLBY DIGITAL/PCMB to APCM ONLYB.  
These instructions enable you to connect your unit to a Dolby  
Digital Decoder or an amplifier with built-in DTS.  
A Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
B Press D E to select ADVD VIDEO SET UPB, then press G.  
C Press D E to select AAUDIO OUTPUTB, then press G.  
D Press F G to select ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB, then press  
ENTER.  
E Press F G to select APCM ONLYB, then press ENTER.  
(A pg. 78)  
F Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
G Press AUDIO to select the desired audio channel.  
Dolby Digital Decoder or  
amplifier with built-in DTS  
To DIGITAL AUDIO input  
Connecting/Using A Decoder  
(HDD & DVD Deck Only)  
Coaxial cable  
(not supplied)  
Optical cable  
(not supplied)  
The [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector can be used as an input  
connector for an external decoder (descrambler). Simply connect a  
decoder and you can enjoy a variety of programming that is  
available through scrambled channels.  
To [DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUT (COAXIAL)]  
To [DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUT (OPTICAL)]  
Decoder  
TV aerial cable  
Rear of unit  
[L-1 IN/OUT]  
TV  
Note for connection:  
Remove the protection cap from the optical cable.  
[L-2 IN/DECODER]  
RF cable (supplied)  
1 Connect the unit and a Dolby Digital Decoder or an amplifier  
with built-in DTS using either an optional optical cable or an  
optional coaxial cable.  
NOTES:  
1 Set AL-2 SELECTB to ADECODERB. (A pg. 72)  
For Dolby Digital sound, set ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB to ADOLBY  
DIGITAL/PCMB. (A pg. 78)  
2 Connect your unit’s [L-2 IN/DECODER] connector to the  
decoder’s 21-pin SCART connector using a 21-pin SCART  
cable.  
For DTS sound, set ADIGITAL AUDIO OUTB to ASTREAM/PCMB.  
(A pg. 78)  
3 Perform the procedure as described in AWhen Receiving A  
CAUTIONS:  
Scrambled Broadcast (HDD & DVD Deck Only)B (A pg. 85).  
This unit has a dynamic range of more than 110 dB with regards  
to its Hi-Fi audio capability. It is recommended that you check the  
maximum level if you are going to listen to the Hi-Fi audio signals  
through a stereo amplifier. A sudden surge in the input level to  
the speakers may damage them.  
Some speakers and televisions are specially shielded to prevent  
television interference. If both are of the non-shielded type, do  
not place the speakers adjacent to the TV set as this can  
adversely affect the playback picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
78  
* The boldface settings below indicate the settings at your purchase.  
Mode Set  
AUDIO OUTPUT  
(HDD & DVD Deck Only)  
8 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT ^ DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM / STREAM/  
PCM / PCM ONLY  
Set to the appropriate mode according to the type of the device  
connected to [DIGITAL AUDIO OUT] connector.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM:  
Select this when you connect the digital input connector of a  
Dolby Digital Decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby Digital  
Decoder.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
STREAM/PCM:  
HDD  
Select this when you connect the digital input connector of an  
amplifier with a built-in DTS, Dolby Digital, or MPEG  
multichannel decoder.  
DVD  
PCM ONLY:  
Select this when you connect the linear PCM digital input of  
other audio equipment (amplifier, MD or DAT deck, etc.).  
NOTES:  
This setting also functions when HDD is active.  
If you watch or play back a title which contains multiple audio  
languages, select APCM ONLYB in advance and choose main or  
sub audio with AUDIO.  
ENTER  
rtwe  
8 ANALOG AUDIO OUT ^ STEREO / DOLBY SURROUND  
Select the appropriate setting to accommodate the unit to the  
connected A/V equipment. This function takes effect when a  
DVD VIDEO disc is played back.  
SET UP  
STEREO:  
Select this when listening to conventional two-channel stereo  
audio with the unit’s [AUDIO OUT] connectors connected to a  
stereo amplifier/receiver or TV set, or in case you want to  
record the audio from a DVD VIDEO disc to a Mini Disc, etc.  
AUDIO  
DOLBY SURROUND:  
Various modes of this unit are categorized into menus nested in 2  
levels shown in the following table. To change the settings of these  
modes, find the desired mode in the menu (for details on each  
menu, see pages 78 through 80), then follow the procedure below.  
Select this when listening to multichannel surround audio with  
the unit’s [AUDIO OUT] connectors connected to an amplifier/  
receiver with a built-in surround decoder or a surround decoder.  
8 D. RANGE CONTROL ^ NORMAL / WIDE RANGE / TV MODE  
The dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and  
the quietest one) can be compressed during playback of a  
programme encoded in Dolby Digital format.  
This function takes effect when a DVD VIDEO disc recorded in  
Dolby Digital format is played back at low or middle volume.  
DVD VIDEO SET UP  
LANGUAGE SET (A pg. 20)  
AUDIO OUTPUT (A pg. 78)  
PARENTAL LOCK (A pg. 33)  
DISC PLAY SET UP (A pg. 79)  
HDD/DVD SET UP  
FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
HDD SET UP (A pg. 79)  
DVD SET UP (A pg. 79)  
DISC SET UP (A pg. 87, 88)  
NORMAL:  
Normally select this setting to activate this function.  
WIDE RANGE:  
REC/PLAY SET UP (A pg. 79)  
DISPLAY SET (A pg. 80)  
VIDEO IN/OUT (A pg. 21, 72)  
Select this to deactivate this function when you enjoy wide  
dynamic range programme.  
TV MODE:  
Select this when you hear the sound through the TV’s  
speaker(s).  
TUNER SET (A pg. 83)  
CLOCK SET (A pg. 86)  
NOTES:  
This function has no effect on programmes other than that  
recorded in Dolby Digital format.  
The procedure below shows how to set the desired option of the  
AAUDIO RECB mode as an example.  
This function does not work when Simulated Surround Effect is  
activated. (A pg. 31)  
The effect of ANORMALB and AWIDE RANGEB may not be  
different depending on discs.  
1 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
the unit.  
2 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
3 Press D E to select AFUNCTION SET UPB, then press G.  
4 Press D E to select AREC/  
8 OUTPUT LEVEL ^ STANDARD / LOW  
You can lower the output level of analogue audio to accommodate  
the unit to the connected A/V equipment.  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
PLAY SET UPB, then press G.  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
DISPLAY SET  
VIDEO IN/OUT  
XP MODE REC AUDIO  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
5 Press F G to select AAUDIO  
STANDARD:  
AUDIO REC  
DIRECT REC  
NICAM  
OFF  
RECB, then press ENTER.  
Normally select this setting.  
INPUT COLOUR SYSTEM  
JUMP TIME  
PAL  
6 Press F G to select the  
desired option, then press  
ENTER.  
LOW:  
15 MIN  
The output level of analogue audio is lowered.  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT  
7 Press SET UP to complete the  
setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
79  
DISC PLAY SET UP  
REC/PLAY SET UP  
8 RESUME ^ OFF / ON / DISC RESUME  
8 XP MODE REC AUDIO ^ DOLBY DIGITAL / LINEAR PCM  
When this function is set to AONB or ADISC RESUMEB, you can use  
the resume function. (A pg. 26)  
You can select the audio format when you record a title in XP  
mode. When this function is set to ALINEAR PCMB, you can obtain  
a high-quality audio sound.  
OFF:  
You cannot use the resume function.  
DOLBY DIGITAL:  
To record in Dolby Digital format.  
ON:  
You can start playback from the resume point of the placed  
disc.  
LINEAR PCM:  
To record in Linear PCM format.  
DISC RESUME:  
8 AUDIO REC ^ NICAM / MONO  
The unit retains a memory of the resume points of the last 30  
discs played back, even though they have been ejected.  
You can select the desired NICAM audio channel to be recorded  
on a DVD-R/RW (Video mode) disc.  
NOTE:  
NICAM:  
ADISC RESUMEB setting works on DVD VIDEO, VCD, SVCD and  
already finalised DVD-R/DVD-RW (video mode) discs. For other  
types of discs, the function under AONB setting will be applied even  
To record the main and sub language of NICAM audio.  
MONO:  
To record the standard (monaural) sound of NICAM audio.  
NOTE:  
HDD SET UP  
This function works only for the NICAM bilingual programme.  
8 LIVE MEMORY ^ OFF / 30 MIN / 1 HR / 3 HR  
When this function is set to A30 MINB, A1 HRB or A3 HRB, you can  
apply the selected time length to ATemporary recording for Live  
8 DIRECT REC ^ OFF / ON  
When this function is set to AONB, you can easily start recording the  
programme that you are watching on your TV. While holding R,  
NOTES:  
DVD SET UP  
When you use the Direct Rec function, be sure to use a TV  
offering T-V LINK, etc. and connect a fully-wired 21-pin SCART  
cable between the unit and the TV. (A pg. 16)  
If ADIRECT RECB is set to AOFFB, the R button functions as  
described in ABasic RecordingB (A pg. 34, 37).  
During Direct Rec, A– –B appears on the front display panel.  
If a programme is recorded with the Direct Rec, the station name  
will not be registered in the library. A– – – –B will be displayed for  
the station name.  
8 SAVE AS LIBRARY ^ OFF / ON  
When this function is set to AONB, the recording information is  
automatically stored in the library. For details, refer to AEdit Library  
InformationB (A pg. 62).  
8 CONTINUOUS PLAY ^ OFF / ON  
When this function is set to AONB, multiple titles on a disc are  
played back continuously one after another.  
Even if there is no power supply for more than 60 minutes, the  
unit keeps the setting.  
8 VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT ^ PRIORITIZE 4:3 /  
PRIORITIZE 16:9  
This is the setting for the aspect ratio used when you dub titles to  
DVD discs in video mode. If the titles you want to dub are recorded  
in both 16:9 and 4:3, you must select one aspect ratio.  
8 INPUT COLOUR SYSTEM ^ PAL / SECAM  
You can play back PAL discs, or record PAL and SECAM signals  
on this unit. Select the appropriate colour system.  
PRIORITIZE 4:3:  
PAL:  
If you select APRIORITIZE 4:3B, even a title recorded in 16:9 is  
To record PAL signals.  
dubbed in 4:3.  
SECAM:  
PRIORITIZE 16:9:  
To record SECAM signals or a MESECAM tape.  
If you select APRIORITIZE 16:9B, even a title recorded in 4:3 is  
dubbed in 16:9.  
8 JUMP TIME ^ 15 MIN / 30 MIN / 1 HR  
You can locate a scene ahead of or behind the currently viewed  
one by jumping a selected time interval during playback (or Live  
Memory Playback). For details, refer to AJump SearchB (A pg. 26,  
40).  
8 VIDEO MODE RECORDING AUDIO ^ MAIN / SUB  
This is the setting for the audio channel to be selected when  
dubbing titles to DVD discs in video mode. Select either one of the  
two settings if the titles to be dubbed have two audio channels.  
MAIN:  
Select this to dub the main channel.  
SUB:  
Select this to dub the sub channel.  
8 MP3 & WMA / JPEG ^ MP3 & WMA / JPEG  
You can select files to play back, when both MP3&WMA files and  
JPEG files are recorded on a disc.  
MP3 & WMA:  
Select this to play back MP3/WMA files.  
JPEG:  
Select this to play back JPEG files.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
80  
DISPLAY SET  
8 SUPERIMPOSE ^ OFF / AUTO  
When this function is set to AAUTOB, various operational indicators  
appear on the TV screen. Messages appear in the selected  
language. (A pg. 20)  
OFF:  
To turn off superimposed indications.  
AUTO:  
To superimpose operational indications for approximately five  
seconds just after the corresponding operation.  
NOTES:  
Even when ASUPERIMPOSEB is set to AOFFB, you can display  
the various operational indicators by pressing ON SCREEN. To  
clear the operational indicators, press ON SCREEN again.  
When you use this unit as the source player for editing, be sure to  
set ASUPERIMPOSEB to AOFFB before starting. (A pg. 71)  
When you select AAUTOB, during playback, the operation mode  
indicators may be disturbed depending on the type of disc being  
used.  
8 BLUE BACK ^ OFF / ON  
When this function is set to AONB, the TV screen becomes all blue  
when receiving a channel not in use.  
NOTE:  
When you want to receive an unstable channel with poor signals,  
set this function to AOFFB.  
8 DIMMER ^ BRIGHT / DIMMED  
You can change the brightness of the front display panel.  
BRIGHT:  
Normally select this.  
DIMMED:  
To dim the front display panel. (Blue lamp on the front display  
panel is turned off.)  
8 POWER SAVE ^ OFF / ON  
When this function is set to AONB, you can reduce the power  
consumption while the unit is turned off.  
NOTES:  
During Power Save mode ^  
^ the front display panel will be turned off.  
^ the Just Clock function (A pg. 86) does not work.  
Power Save does not work when ^  
^ the unit is in the Timer mode.  
^ the unit’s power is turned off after timer-recording or Instant  
Timer Recording.  
^ the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording mode is  
engaged. (A pg. 53)  
^ AL-2 SELECTB is set to ADECODERB, ASAT VIDEOB or ASAT  
S-VIDEOB. (A pg. 72)  
It takes some time for the unit to complete initialisation after you  
turn on the unit power, with AWAKE UPB blinking on the front  
display panel.  
8 ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
This unit offers you the choice to view on-screen messages in 10  
different languages. Though Auto Set Up selects the language  
automatically (A pg. 19), you can change the language setting  
manually as required.  
For details, refer to AOn-screen Language SetB (A pg. 20)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
EN  
81  
* The boldface settings below indicate the settings at your purchase.  
Mode Set  
8 B.E.S.T. ^ ON / OFF  
You can set the B.E.S.T. (Biconditional Equalised Signal Tracking)  
(VHS Deck Only)  
system to AONB or AOFFB. (A pg. 45)  
NOTES:  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
When watching a tape recorded with AB.E.S.T.B set to AONB, it is  
recommended that you leave B.E.S.T. on during playback as  
well.  
When watching a rental tape or one recorded on another video  
recorder, or when using this unit as the player for editing, set  
B.E.S.T. to your preference.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
The B.E.S.T. system works for both SP and LP modes only after  
a tape has been inserted and the Record mode is first initiated. It  
does not work during recording.  
VHS  
The B.E.S.T. system does not work while Automatic Satellite  
Programme Recording is in progress. (A pg. 45)  
In the case of timer recordings, the B.E.S.T. system works before  
recording is initiated.  
Once the cassette is ejected, the B.E.S.T. data is cancelled. The  
next time the cassette is used for recording, B.E.S.T. is re-  
performed.  
Pressing the unit’s R button while ABESTB is displayed does not  
start Instant Timer Recording. (A pg. 45)  
rtwe  
ENTER  
8 PICTURE CONTROL ^ AUTO / EDIT / SOFT  
This feature helps you to adjust the playback picture quality  
according to your preference. Normally select AAUTOB.  
AUTO:  
SET UP  
Picture quality is adjusted automatically.  
EDIT:  
Minimises picture degradation during editing (recording and  
playback).  
SOFT:  
Reduces image coarseness when viewing overplayed tapes  
containing a lot of noise.  
You can change various mode settings on the Function Set  
screen.  
To change the settings of these modes, find the desired mode in  
the menu (for details on each menu, see pages 81 through 82),  
then follow the procedure below.  
NOTES:  
When you select AEDITB or ASOFTB, the selected mode will not  
change until you select another mode.  
When you select AEDITB to dub tapes, be sure to select ANORMB  
after you finish dubbing the tapes.  
When AB.E.S.T.B is AOFFB, APICTURE CONTROLB switches  
automatically from AAUTOB to ANORMB.  
1 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
2 Press SET UP to access the  
MODE SET  
Function Set screen.  
B.E.S.T.  
ON  
AUTO  
PICTURE CONTROL  
O.S.D.  
AUTO SPNLP TIMER  
COLOUR SYSTEM  
3 Press F G to select the item you  
want to change, then press  
ENTER or E to select the desired  
mode.  
AUTO  
8 O.S.D. ^ AUTO / OFF  
OFF  
PAL/NTSC  
When this function is set to AAUTOB, various operational indicators  
appear on the TV screen. Messages appear in the selected  
language. (A pg. 20)  
[JK] N [ENTER]  
[SET UP] : EXIT  
4 Press SET UP to complete the  
NOTES:  
setting.  
Even when AO.S.D.B is set to AOFFB, you can display the various  
operational indicators by pressing ON SCREEN. To clear the  
operational indicators, press ON SCREEN again.  
When you use this unit as the source player for editing, be sure to  
set AO.S.D.B to AOFFB before starting.  
During playback, the operation mode indicators may be disturbed  
depending on the type of tape being used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
82  
8 AUTO SPNLP TIMER ^ ON / OFF  
Tray Lock (DVD Deck Only)  
When this function is set to AONB, the unit automatically switches to  
LP mode to allow complete recording if there is not enough tape to  
record the entire programme while timer-recording in SP mode.  
You can lock the disc tray to prohibit the unwanted disc ejection by  
children.  
For Example:  
Turn off the unit.  
Recording a programme of 140 minutes in length onto a 120-  
minute tape.  
M
o
Approximately 30 minutes  
LP mode  
Approximately 110 minutes  
SP mode  
Total 140 minutes  
Make sure you set this function to AONB, before the timer-recording  
starts.  
NOTES:  
To lock tray  
If you have programmed the unit to timer-record 2 or more  
programmes, the second programme and those thereafter may  
not fit on the tape if you set AAUTO SPNLP TIMERB to AONB. In  
this case, make sure the mode is not engaged, then set the tape  
speed manually during timer programming.  
While the unit is turned off, press and hold o, then press M on the  
unit. ALOCKB appears on the front display panel and the disc tray is  
locked.  
To unlock tray  
While the unit is turned off, press and hold o, then press M on the  
unit. AUNLOCKB appears on the front display panel.  
In order to ensure that the recording fits on the tape, this feature  
may leave a slight non-recorded section at the end of the tape.  
There may be some noise and sound disturbance at the point on  
the tape where the unit switches from SP to LP mode.  
The Auto SPNLP Timer feature is not available during ITR  
(Instant Timer Recording), and the feature will not work properly  
on the following tapes: T(ST)-30, T(ST)-60, T(ST)-90, and  
T(ST)-120.  
8 COLOUR SYSTEM ^ PAL/NTSC / MESECAM  
You can play back PAL, NTSC and MESECAM tapes, or record  
PAL and SECAM* signals on this unit. Select the appropriate  
colour system.  
* SECAM signals will be recorded as MESECAM on this unit; MESECAM is  
the designation for tapes with SECAM signals that have been recorded on  
a MESECAM-compatible PAL video cassette recorder.  
PAL/NTSC:  
To record PAL signals, or play back a PAL or NTSC tape.  
MESECAM:  
To record SECAM signals, or play back a MESECAM tape.  
NOTES:  
SECAM signals recorded on the HDD or DVD deck are played  
back as PAL signals. As such, when dubbing to VHS deck, make  
sure to set ACOLOUR SYSTEMB to APAL/NTSCB.  
About NTSC Playback  
Some TVs shrink the picture vertically and place black bars at the  
top and bottom of the TV screen. This is not a malfunction on the  
part of either the unit or the TV.  
The picture may roll up and down. This can be corrected using  
the V-HOLD control found on some TVs. (This cannot be  
corrected if the TV does not have a V-HOLD control.)  
The counter and tape remaining time readings will be incorrect.  
During search, still, or frame-by-frame playback, the picture will  
be distorted, and there may be a loss of colour.  
Depending on the type of TV, the top and bottom portions of  
superimposed displays may be cut off during NTSC playback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
83  
Tuner Set  
c System Setup  
IMPORTANT:  
Normally, Auto Set Up (A pg. 17), Preset Download (A pg. 18)  
or Auto Channel Set (A pg. 83) sets the Guide Programme  
numbers automatically. You need to set the Guide Programme  
numbers manually only in the following cases.  
When timer-programming with the a system, the  
channel position, where the station you wish to record is  
received on your unit, is not selected,  
Your unit needs to memorise all necessary stations in channel  
positions in order to record TV programmes. Auto Channel Set  
automatically assigns all receivable stations in your area to call  
them up by using the PR +/– buttons without going through any  
vacant channels.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
OR  
CABLE/SAT  
when you add a channel after Auto Set Up, Preset Download  
or Auto Channel Set has taken place,  
TV  
DVD  
^ Set the Guide Programme number for that station manually.  
When you wish to timer-record a satellite programme with the  
a system,  
^ Set the Guide Programme numbers for all satellite  
broadcasts received on your satellite receiver.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
ENTER  
rtwe  
Guide Programme Number Set  
1 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
2 Press D E to select AINITIAL SET UPB, then press G.  
3 Press D E to select ATUNER  
SET UP  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
SETB, then press G.  
TUNER SET  
CLOCK SET  
AUTO CH SET  
MANUAL CH SET  
4 Press FGD E to select  
AGUIDE PROG SETB, then  
press ENTER.  
SAT CONTROL SET  
GUIDE PROG SET  
11  
2  
13  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT  
IMPORTANT:  
5 Press F G to select AGUIDE  
PROGB, then press ENTER.  
11  
12  
13  
Perform the following steps only if ^  
INITIAL SET UP > GUIDE PROG SET  
^ Auto Channel Set has not been set correctly by Auto Set Up  
or by Preset Download. (A pg. 17, 18)  
^ you have moved to a different area or if a new station starts  
broadcasting in your area.  
GUIDE PROG  
TV PROG  
1
6 Press F G to select the Guide  
Programme number for the  
desired station as shown in  
the TV listings. Then press  
ENTER.  
YLE2  
1
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
Auto Channel Set  
SELECT  
7 Press F G to select ATV  
PROGB, then press ENTER.  
1 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
2 Press D E to select AINITIAL SET UPB, then press G.  
3 Press D E to select ATUNER SETB, then press G.  
4 Press FGD E to select AAUTO  
Press F G to select the number of the unit’s channel position  
by the unit or the satellite receiver. Then press ENTER.  
Pressing AUX changes ATV PROGB to ASATB.  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
To timer-record a satellite programme with the a  
system, you need to install the provided Satellite Controller and  
perform the procedure described in ASatellite Receiver Control  
Setting (HDD & DVD Deck Only)B (A pg. 22).  
CH SETB, then press ENTER.  
TUNER SET  
CLOCK SET  
AUTO CH SET  
MANUAL CH SET  
5 Press FGD E to select your  
country’s name, then press  
ENTER.  
SAT CONTROL SET  
GUIDE PROG SET  
11  
12  
13  
Repeat steps 5 7 as necessary.  
6 Press FGD E to select the  
8 Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
language of your choice.  
SELECT  
Guide Programme Number  
7 Press ENTER twice.  
When you have connected the  
via a fully-wired 21-pin SCART  
cable (A pg. 16), the unit  
automatically performs the  
Preset Download and the T-V  
LINK screen will appear.  
(A pg. 18)  
AGuide Programme (GUIDE PROG) numberB refers to the  
assigned TV station numbers, according to broadcast area, for  
the a timer recording. The Guide Programme Numbers  
can be found in most TV listings.  
INITIAL SET UP > AUTO SET  
AUTO SET  
PLEASE WAIT...  
CANCEL  
ENTER  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT  
The Auto Set screen appears,  
and remains on screen while the unit searches for receivable  
stations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
84  
8 View the Confirmation screen.  
Manual Channel Set  
Store channels that were not stored during Auto Set Up  
(A pg. 17), Preset Download (A pg. 18) or Auto Channel Set  
(A pg. 83).  
AAUTO SET COMPLETEDB or ASCAN COMPLETEDB is  
displayed on the TV screen.  
After selecting AOKB, APLEASE WAIT...B appears on the screen  
while channel data is being transferred to the VHS deck. During  
this period (approximately 80 seconds), the VHS deck is not  
operable. It will exit the AUTO SET mode once APLEASE  
WAIT...B disappears from the screen.  
ATTENTION:  
When closing the Confirmation screen, APLEASE WAIT...B  
appears on the screen while channel data is being transferred to  
the VHS deck. During this period (approximately 80 seconds),  
the VHS deck is not operable. It will exit the current mode once  
APLEASE WAIT...B disappears from the screen.  
9 Press SET UP to complete the setting.  
Using the Confirmation screen, you can skip or add channel  
Refer to pages 84 – 85 for the procedures.  
Depending on reception conditions, the stations may not be  
stored in order, and the station names may not be stored  
correctly.  
1 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
2 Press D E to select AINITIAL SET UPB, then press G.  
3 Press D E to select ATUNER SETB, then press G.  
For information on scrambled broadcasts, refer to AWhen  
Receiving A Scrambled Broadcast (HDD & DVD Deck Only)B  
(A pg. 85).  
4 Press FGD E to select AMANUAL CH SETB, then press  
ENTER. The Manual Channel Set screen appears.  
IMPORTANT:  
5 Press D E to select AEDITB, then press ENTER.  
In certain reception conditions, station names may not be  
stored correctly, and Auto Guide Programme Number Set may  
not work properly. When the Guide Programme numbers are  
not set properly, the programme that you do not intended to  
record will be timer-recorded by the a system of the  
unit. When programming the timer using the a system,  
be sure to check the desired channel is selected correctly.  
(A pg. 49, 54)  
6 Press FGD E to select a blank  
(Example) To store in position 12.  
position in which you want to  
INITIAL SET UP > MANUAL CH SET  
store a channel, then press  
ENTER. The Confirmation  
screen appears.  
CH  
ID  
CH  
ID  
PR  
01  
PR  
07  
08  
C01  
02  
----  
----  
----  
02  
CTEA  
03  
04  
05  
06  
05  
C79  
01  
1000  
3SAT  
9LIV  
AB3  
09  
10  
11  
12  
----  
----  
----  
----  
7 Press F G to select ABANDB,  
then press ENTER.  
04  
<
>
Your unit memorises all receivable stations even if reception of  
some of them is poor. You can delete those stations with an  
ChannelB)  
MOVE  
EDIT  
RETURN  
The programme currently  
received on the selected channel  
position appears behind the  
confirmation screen.  
NOTES:  
Fine tuning is performed automatically during Auto Channel Set.  
If you want to perform tuning manually, refer to AFine-Tuning  
Channels Already StoredB (A pg. 85).  
8 Press F G to change the band  
between CH (regular) and CC  
(cable), then press ENTER.  
INITIAL SET UP > MANUAL CH SET  
BAND  
CH  
CH  
2
If you perform Auto Channel Set when the aerial cable is not  
connected properly, ASCAN COMPLETED -NO SIGNAL-B  
appears on the TV screen in step 8. In such a case, make sure of  
the aerial connection and press ENTER; Auto Channel Set will  
start again.  
If no sound accompanies the picture or the audio sounds  
unnatural on some channels that have been stored by Auto Set  
Up, the TV system setting for those channels may be incorrect.  
Select the appropriate TV system for those channels. (A pg. 85,  
AINFORMATIONB).  
----  
ID  
9 Press F G to select ACHB, then  
FINE  
press ENTER.  
DECODER  
OFF  
RETURN  
10Press F G to input the  
channel number you want to  
store.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SET UP  
EXIT  
To enter the registered  
station name (A pg. 98), press F G to select AIDB, then press  
ENTER. Press F G.  
For fine tuning adjustment, press F G to select AFINEB, then  
press ENTER. Press F G to perform fine-tuning.  
When storing a channel that sends scrambled broadcasts,  
press F G to select ADECODERB, then press ENTER. Press  
F G to set ADECODERB to AONB (AOFFB is the default setting).  
When AL-2 SELECTB is set to AVIDEOB, AS-VIDEOB, ASAT  
VIDEOB or ASAT S-VIDEOB, the ADECODERB setting cannot  
11Press ENTER to enter new channel information. The  
Confirmation screen appears.  
12Press SET UP or RETURN to close the Confirmation screen.  
To change positions, see AChange Station Channel PositionB  
(A pg. 85).  
If you wish to set station names other than the ones registered  
in your unit, see ASet Stations (B)B (A pg. 85).  
ATTENTION:  
Guide Programme numbers are not set when channels are  
stored manually. (A pg. 83, Ac System SetupB)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
85  
Delete A Channel  
Set Stations (A)  
Set station names that are registered in your unit.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 of AManual Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
2 Press FGD E to select the channel you want to delete.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 of AManual Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
2 Press FGD E to select the channel you want to modify, then  
3 Press CANCEL(L) to delete a channel. The channel next to  
press ENTER. The Confirmation screen appears.  
the cancelled one moves up one line.  
Repeat steps 2 3 as necessary.  
3 Press F G to select AIDB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press SET UP or RETURN to close the Confirmation screen.  
4 Move the arrow to the left ID selection column. Registered  
station names (ID) (A pg. 98) appear as you press F G.  
Change Station Channel Position  
5 Press ENTER to select the desired ID, then press ENTER  
again to select AOKB.  
1 Perform steps 1 4 of AManual Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
2 Press D E to select AMOVEB, then press ENTER.  
6 Press RETURN to return to the Manual Channel Set screen.  
Repeat steps 2 5 as necessary.  
3 Press FGD E to select the channel you want to move, then  
7 Press SET UP or RETURN to close the Confirmation screen.  
press ENTER.  
4 Press FGD E to select the new channel position, then press  
ENTER.  
Example: If you moved the station in position 4 to position 2, the  
stations originally in positions 2 and 3 each move down  
one space.  
Set Stations (B)  
Set station names other than the ones registered in your unit.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 of AManual Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
2 Press FGD E to select the channel you want to modify, then  
press ENTER. The Confirmation screen appears.  
INITIAL SET UP > MANUAL CH SET  
INITIAL SET UP > MANUAL CH SET  
CH  
ID  
CH  
PR  
01  
PR  
CH  
ID  
ID  
CH  
PR  
01  
PR  
ID  
3 Press F G to select AIDB, then press ENTER.  
C01  
02  
----  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
C01  
C79  
----  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
----  
02  
CTEA  
02  
3SAT  
4 Press FGD E to select the desired characters (A–Z, 0–9, –, Z,  
03  
04  
05  
06  
05  
C79  
01  
1000  
3SAT  
9LIV  
AB3  
03  
04  
05  
06  
02  
05  
01  
04  
CTEA  
1000  
9LIV  
AB3  
+, & (space)), then press ENTER.  
Enter the remaining characters the same way (maximum of 4).  
04  
5 After entering all characters, press FGD E to select AOKB, then  
<
>
<
>
MOVE  
EDIT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
MOVE  
EDIT  
press ENTER.  
Repeat steps 3 4 as necessary.  
6 Press RETURN to return to the Manual Channel Set screen.  
Repeat steps 2 5 as necessary.  
7 Press SET UP or RETURN to close the Confirmation screen.  
When Receiving A Scrambled Broadcast (HDD & DVD  
Deck Only)  
NOTE:  
The characters available for the station name (ID) are A–Z, 0–9, –,  
Z, +, & (space) (maximum of 4).  
1 Set AL-2 SELECTB to ADECODERB. (A pg. 72)  
Fine-Tuning Channels Already Stored  
2 Perform steps 1 5 of AManual Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
3 Press FGD E to select the channel position broadcasting  
scrambled programmes, then press ENTER. The Confirmation  
screen appears.  
1 Perform steps 1 5 of AManual Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
2 Press FGD E to select the channel you want to fine-tune, then  
press ENTER. The Confirmation screen appears.  
4 Press F G to select ADECODERB, then press ENTER.  
5 Press F G to set ADECODERB to AONB, then press ENTER.  
3 Press F G to select AFINEB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press F G until the picture appears in its best quality, then  
6 Press RETURN to return to the Manual Channel Set screen.  
press ENTER.  
Repeat steps 3 5 as necessary.  
Repeat steps 2 4 as necessary.  
7 Press SET UP or RETURN to close the Confirmation screen.  
5 Press RETURN to return to the Manual Channel Set screen.  
6 Press SET UP or RETURN to close the Confirmation screen.  
INFORMATION  
If you live in Eastern Europe, ATV SYSTEMB setting appears  
instead of ADECODERB setting on the Manual Channel Set  
screen. When you can see the picture but can hear no audio,  
select appropriate TV system (D/K or B/G). Normally, TV  
For Eastern Europe : D/K  
For Western Europe : B/G  
A Select a country in Eastern Europe in step 5 of AAuto  
Channel SetB (A pg. 83).  
B Press F G to select ATV SYSTEMB in step 7 of AManual  
Channel SetB (A pg. 84).  
C Press F G to select appropriate TV System (D/K or B/G).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                             
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
86  
6 Press F G to select ATV PROGRAMMEB, then press ENTER.  
Press F G to set the channel position to the number  
representing the station transmitting clock setting data, then  
press ENTER.  
The unit is preset to receive clock setting and adjustment data  
from channel position 1.  
IMPORTANT:  
If you performed Auto Set Up (A pg. 17) or Preset Download  
(A pg. 18), without ever having set the clock previously, the  
unit’s built-in clock is also set automatically.  
Perform the following steps only if ^  
7 Press SET UP to start the clock operation.  
NOTES:  
Just Clock (when set to AONB) adjusts the unit’s built-in clock  
every hour, except for 23:00, 0:00, 1:00 and 2:00.  
Just Clock is not effective when:  
^ Auto Clock Set has not been performed correctly by Auto Set  
Up or Preset Download.  
OR  
^ the unit’s power is on.  
^ the unit is in the Timer mode.  
^ a difference of more than 3 minutes exists between the built-in  
clock’s time and the actual time.  
^ you want to change Just Clock setting. (See AJust ClockB in  
the right column)  
^ the unit is in the Automatic Satellite Programme Recording  
mode. (A pg. 53) (HDD deck only)  
^ the unit is in the Power Save mode. (A pg. 80)  
^ AL-2 SELECTB is set to ASAT VIDEOB or ASAT S-VIDEOB.  
(A pg. 72)  
If Just Clock is set to AONB, the unit’s clock is automatically  
adjusted at the start/end of Summer Time.  
Just Clock may not function properly depending on the reception  
condition.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
CABLE/SAT  
TV  
DVD  
Just Clock  
The Just Clock function provides accurate time keeping through  
automatic adjustments at regular intervals, by reading data from a  
PDC signal.  
The Just Clock option can be set to AONB or AOFFB at the Clock Set  
screen (the default setting is AOFFB).  
ENTER  
rtwe  
IMPORTANT:  
If you turn off Just Clock, the accuracy of your unit’s built-in clock  
may be reduced, which could adversely effect timer recording. We  
recommend you to keep Just Clock on. In cases where the clock  
setting data from a PDC signal is incorrect, however, you are  
advised to keep Just Clock set to AOFFB.  
SET UP  
1 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
2 Press D E to select AINITIAL SET UPB, then press G.  
3 Press D E to select ACLOCK  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
SETB, then press G.  
TUNER SET  
CLOCK SET  
YEAR  
DATE  
TIME  
2004  
NOTE:  
01. 01 THU  
When you have selected  
AMAGYARORSZÁGB, AČESKÁ  
REPUBLIKAB, APOLSKAB or  
AOTHER EASTERNB for the  
country setting (A pg. 17), you  
cannot use Just Clock  
--:--  
OFF  
1
JUST CLOCK  
TV PROGRAMME  
ENTER  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
SELECT  
function. Skip steps 5 and 6.  
4 Press F G to select AYEARB, then press ENTER. Press F G to  
set the year, then press ENTER.  
Repeat the same procedure to set the date and time.  
When you set the date, press and hold F G to change the date  
by 15 days interval.  
When you set the time, press and hold F G to change the time  
by 30 minutes interval.  
5 Press F G to select AJUST CLOCKB, then press ENTER. Press  
F G to set to the desired mode, then press ENTER.  
The default setting is AOFFB.  
For the Just clock function, refer to AJust ClockB on the right  
column.  
If you set to AOFFB, you can disregard the next step as you  
won’t be able to receive regular clock adjustments.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
87  
Format A DVD-RAM Disc  
Format A Disc (DVD Deck Only)  
1 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
the unit.  
2 Press SET UP to access the Main Menu screen.  
3 Press D E to select AHDD/DVD SET UPB, then press G.  
4 Press D E to select ADISC SET  
Some DVD-RAM/RW discs are unformatted.  
Format the disc when you use an unformatted disc or you want to  
delete all recordings and data on the disc.  
DVD VIDEO SET UP HDD/DVD SET UP FUNCTION SET UP  
INITIAL SET UP  
UPB, then press G.  
HDD SET UP  
DVD SET UP  
DISC SET UP  
FINALISE  
Video  
CANC. FINALIS.  
5 Press FGD E to select  
ATTENTION:  
AFORMATB, then press  
When a disc is formatted, all recordings and data are erased. It  
is impossible to restore them.  
Never turn off the unit or disconnect the mains power cord  
while ANOW FORMATTING...B is displayed on the TV screen.  
ENTER. Press D E to select  
AOKB, then press ENTER.  
FORMAT  
ENTER  
SET UP  
EXIT  
SELECT WITH @ THEN PRESS [ENTER]  
PRESS [SET UP] TO EXIT  
6 Press D E to select  
AEXECUTEB, then press  
ENTER.  
SELECT  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Load a DVD-RAM/RW disc to format.  
Format A DVD-RW Disc  
1 Perform steps 1 to 4 of AFormat A DVD-RAM DiscB as above  
before continuing.  
CABLE/SAT  
2 Press FGD E to select AFORMATB, then press ENTER. Press  
D E to choose AVR MODEB or AVIDEO MODEB, then press  
ENTER when ADISC WILL BE FORMATTEDB appears on the  
TV screen.  
TV  
DVD  
AVR MODEB:  
To be chosen when you want to record, erase, or edit data on  
the disc repeatedly.  
AVIDEO MODEB:  
To be chosen when you want to erase all the data on the disc  
once played back to record new data, or play back the disc on  
other DVD players.  
ENTER  
rtwe  
3 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER.  
NOTES:  
It is impossible to format Version 1.0 DVD-RW discs in Video  
mode.  
It is impossible to format DVD-R discs.  
All the titles on a disc will be deleted once the disc is formatted  
even if they are protected titles. (A pg. 59)  
SET UP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
EN  
88  
Finalise A DVD-R/RW Disc  
Finalise A Disc (DVD Deck Only)  
1 Perform steps 1 to 4 of AFormat A DVD-RAM DiscB (A pg. 87)  
before continuing.  
2 Press FGD E to select AFINALISEB, then press ENTER.  
For DVD-R/RW (Video mode) discs, the background selection  
screen will appear. Press FGD E to select the desired  
background from a selection of 18 backgrounds.  
Finalising DVD-R/RW discs recorded on this unit makes it possible  
for the discs to be played back on other DVD players. DVD-RW  
discs are finalised in the mode that the discs were formatted,  
enabling playback on compatible DVD players.  
Title names input in the Library Database Navigation are  
registered as title names in the DVD menu. (A pg. 58)  
3 Press D E to select AOKB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press D E to select AOKB, then press ENTER.  
5 Press SET UP to return to the normal screen.  
Menu screen is cleared.  
Turn on the unit.  
Once a DVD-R/RW (Video mode) disc has been finalised, the  
displays for original and play list do not appear. Only display for  
library appears.  
played on DVD players compatible with VR mode.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
Load a DVD-R/RW disc to finalise.  
CABLE/SAT  
Cancel The Finalisation Of A DVD-RW Disc  
TV  
DVD  
1 Load a DVD-RW disc to cancel the disc finalisation, and  
perform steps 1 to 4 of AFormat A DVD-RAM DiscB (A pg. 87)  
before continuing.  
2 Press FGD E to select ACANC. FINALIS.B, then press ENTER.  
3 Press D E to select AEXECUTEB, then press ENTER.  
4 Press SET UP to return to the normal screen.  
When the disc finalisation is cancelled, the mode in which the  
disc was formatted is restored, making the disc recordable.  
(A pg. 7, 87)  
ENTER  
rtwe  
SET UP  
Before finalising  
It is possible to record on a blank space.  
It is possible to enter title names. (A pg. 58)  
It is possible to delete titles. (A pg. 59)  
It is impossible to overwrite recorded areas of DVD-R discs.  
Available recording capacity does not increase even if a recorded  
title is deleted from a DVD-R disc.  
It is impossible to record or edit DVD-R/RW discs recorded on  
other devices even if they have not been finalised.  
After finalising (For DVD-R/RW (Video mode) discs)  
Video and audio that have been recorded by then are recorded in  
conformity to the DVD Video standard, enabling you to play back  
the discs as DVD VIDEO discs.  
Although DVD-R/RW discs finalised on this unit become playable  
on DVD players compatible with DVD-R/RW discs, some discs  
still may not play, for which JVC cannot take responsibility.  
Marked points marked before finalising will be deleted, and titles  
will be divided automatically into AchaptersB approximately every  
5 minutes. (A pg. 27)  
Depending on the DVD players and DVD-R/RW discs used, and  
on the conditions of recording, it may not be possible to play back  
the discs. In this case, play back the discs on this unit.  
Additional recordings become impossible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SUBSIDIARY SETTINGS  
1 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
the unit.  
Scan Mode Set  
2 Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN for 3 or more seconds.  
Video output indicator (q) lights on the front display panel if  
Progressive scan mode has been established. (A pg. 12)  
Each press of PROGRESSIVE SCAN for 3 or more seconds  
switches the scan mode.  
If you connect the unit and TV with Component Video Connection  
(A pg. 16), you can select the scan mode from two modes:  
Interlaced scan mode which is used in the conventional TV  
system, and Progressive scan mode which enables reproduction  
of higher-quality images.  
NOTES:  
8 Interlaced scan  
When the progressive mode is set, be sure to set AL-1 OUTPUTB  
to ACOMPONENTB (A pg. 72). Progressive scan is output only  
from [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] connector.  
Interlaced scan mode is the setting at your purchase.  
Interlaced scan mode might be suitable depending on video  
material.  
In the conventional video system, a picture is shown on the display  
monitor in two halves. The Interlaced scan system places lines of  
the second half of the picture in-between lines of the first half of the  
picture.  
8 Progressive scan  
Scan mode cannot be set while menu screen is displayed.  
When the Progressive scan mode is engaged, no video signal is  
output from [L-1 IN/OUT] connector.  
Progressive scan displays all the horizontal lines of a picture at  
one time, as a single frame. This system can convert the interlaced  
video from DVD into progressive format for connection to a  
progressive display. It dramatically increases the vertical  
resolution.  
Watch the images on VHS deck in the Progressive  
scan mode via component video  
1 Press HDD or DVD so that the HDD or DVD lamp lights up on  
ATTENTION:  
Your TV needs to be compatible with PAL Progressive.  
the unit.  
2 Set AL-1 OUTPUTB to ACOMPONENTB (A pg. 72), and the  
Progressive-compatible TV to its component input mode.  
Turn on the unit.  
Turn on the TV and select the AV mode.  
Slide the TV/CABLE/SAT/DVD switch to DVD.  
3 Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN for 3 or more seconds.  
The video output indicator q lights up on the front display  
panel.  
CABLE/SAT  
4 Press VHS so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit, then  
TV  
DVD  
press PROGRESSIVE SCAN.  
ACOMP OFFB is displayed on the front display panel. It will be  
displayed for 5 seconds.  
HDD  
VHS  
DVD  
5 Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN again within 5 seconds.  
ACOMP ONB is displayed on the front display panel and q  
lights up on the front display panel.  
The VHS progressive scan image will then be outputted from  
the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR)] connectors.  
NOTES:  
Be sure to engage the HDD or DVD deck in stop mode.  
It is possible to watch in interlace mode through the component  
video connection (AL-1 OUTPUTB set to ACOMPONENTB)  
simply by pressing PROGRESSIVE SCAN to switch to ACOMP  
ONB. However, q will not light up on the front display panel as  
the image outputted is not in progressive mode.  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN  
90  
Before requesting service for a problem, use this chart and see if  
you can solve the trouble yourself. Small problems are often easily  
solved, and this can save you the trouble of sending your unit off  
for repair.  
Playback (DVD Deck)  
The DVD deck cannot be operated.  
The DVD deck is not selected.  
N Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or DVD  
Initialising (DVD Deck Only)  
on the remote so that the DVD lamp lights up on the unit.  
Malfunction occurs on the unit.  
Images do not appear on the TV screen.  
N Press A to turn off the unit, press and hold A, then press o  
The TV receiver’s channel selector is not set to the AV mode.  
for two seconds or more.  
N Set the TV to its AV mode.  
When interlace scanned programme is played back,  
progressive scan mode is selected.  
General  
No power is supplied to the unit.  
N Press and hold PROGRESSIVE SCAN until q disappears  
from the front display panel. (A pg. 89)  
The AC power plug is disconnected from the mains outlet.  
N Connect the AC power plug to the mains outlet securely.  
Playback does not start or stop immediately after playback is  
started by pressing I.  
(A pg. 16)  
On the front display panel, ANO DISCB appears.  
The remote control does not work properly.  
The disc is loaded upside down.  
N Remove the batteries, wait for 5 minutes or more, then load the  
N Place the disc on the disc tray with the playback surface facing  
butteries again.  
down. (A pg. 8)  
The setting of the remote control code is inappropriate.  
A disc not being compatible with the unit is loaded.  
N Load a playable disc on the unit. (A pg. 5)  
A dirty disc is loaded.  
N Clean the disc. (A pg. 9)  
Defective disc is loaded.  
N Set the same remote control code (1, 2, 3, or 4) on both the unit  
and the remote control. (A pg. 74)  
The batteries are discharged.  
N Replace the dead batteries with new ones.  
N Replace the warped or scratched disc with a normal one.  
Dubbing from the external equipment is not possible.  
Images are blurred or distorted when you start High-Speed  
Search.  
The source (another video recorder, camcorder) has not been  
properly connected.  
All necessary power switches have not been turned on.  
N Confirm that all units’ power switches are turned on.  
The setting of the input channel position is inappropriate.  
N Images are blurred or distorted at the point where the playback  
speed changes and this is not a malfunction of the unit.  
Playback does not start.  
N Select the input channel position (AF-1B, AL-1B or AL-2B) that  
corresponds to the input terminal connected to the external  
equipment. (A pg. 71)  
N Playback does not start for approximately 30 seconds after  
Playback does not start when you select a title or a chapter.  
The on-screen display superimposed on the programme  
played back/received on this unit is recorded when you dub  
the programme to an external recording equipment.  
The Parental Lock is engaged and the disc is rated higher than  
the set level.  
N Release the Parental Lock temporarily or change the set level.  
N Set ASUPERIMPOSEB or AO.S.D.B to AOFFB. (A pg. 80, 81)  
(A pg. 33)  
The unit does not operate.  
Playback (HDD Deck)  
The HDD deck cannot be operated.  
There are cases when the operation is prohibited on the disc.  
Lightning or static electricity may cause malfunction of the unit.  
N Press A to turn the power off, then press the button again to  
The HDD deck is not selected.  
turn the power on.  
N Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or HDD  
on the remote so that the HDD lamp lights up on the unit.  
The remote control of a JVC TV will not operate the unit.  
The setting of the remote control code is inappropriate.  
N To operate the unit using a JVC TV remote control, set the  
remote control code of the unit to A1B (Default: A3B). (A pg. 74)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN  
91  
Playback (VHS Deck)  
Recording (HDD Deck)  
The VHS deck cannot be operated.  
TV broadcasts cannot be recorded.  
The VHS deck is not selected.  
AL-1B, AL-2B or AF-1B has been selected as the input mode.  
N Press VHS/HDD/DVD SELECT on the unit repeatedly or VHS  
N Set to the desired channel.  
on the remote so that the VHS lamp lights up on the unit.  
Camcorder recording is not possible.  
The tape will not rewind or fast-forward.  
The camcorder has not been properly connected.  
N Confirm that the camcorder is properly connected.  
The input mode is not correct.  
The tape is already fully rewound or fast-forwarded.  
N Check the cassette.  
N Set the input mode to AF-1B. (A pg. 70)  
The playback picture does not appear while the tape is  
running.  
Recording (VHS Deck)  
The TV is not set to the AV mode.  
During recording, the tape does not run. The VHS recording  
lamp lights up on the unit.  
N Set the TV to the AV mode.  
Noise appears during visual search.  
The unit is in the Record Pause mode.  
This is normal.  
N Press I to resume recording.  
Noise appears during normal playback.  
Recording cannot be done.  
The automatic tracking mode is engaged.  
There is no cassette loaded, or the cassette loaded has had its  
record safety tab removed.  
N Try manual tracking. (A pg. 43)  
N Insert a cassette, or using adhesive tape, cover the hole where  
The playback picture is blurred or interrupted while TV  
broadcasts are clear or AUSE CLEANING CASSETTEB  
message appears on the screen.  
the tab was removed.  
TV broadcasts cannot be recorded.  
AL-1B, AL-2B or AF-1B has been selected as the input mode.  
The video heads may be dirty.  
N Set to the desired channel.  
N Use a dry cleaning cassette TCL-2, or consult your JVC dealer.  
Camcorder recording is not possible.  
Breaks are noticeable in Hi-Fi soundtrack.  
The camcorder has not been properly connected.  
N Confirm that the camcorder is properly connected.  
The input mode is not correct.  
The automatic tracking mode is engaged.  
N Try manual tracking. (A pg. 43)  
N Set the input mode to AF-1B.  
The tape is automatically rewound, then the unit is shut off.  
The desired programme cannot be recorded.  
The end of the tape was reached during recording.  
The channel position does not correspond to that in the  
receiving area.  
N The programme may not have been recorded in its entirety.  
Next time make sure you have enough time on the tape to  
record the entire programme.  
N Set the correct channel position for the receiving broadcast.  
(A pg. 83)  
Recording cannot be made.  
Timer Recording (HDD & DVD Deck)  
No disc or a disc not being compatible with the unit is loaded.  
N Load a recordable disc on the unit. (A pg. 5)  
The disc loaded is not formatted.  
N Format the disc. (A pg. 87)  
Timer programming cannot be made.  
Date and time is not correct.  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
Timer recording is in progress.  
N Recording cannot be made on finalised discs. Load a  
N Timer programming can’t be performed while a timer recording  
recordable disc on the unit.  
is in progress. Wait until it finishes.  
The disc is full or does not have enough space for the title to be  
recorded.  
Timer programming recording does not start.  
N Clear unnecessary titles on the disc or load a blank disc.  
Date and time is not correct.  
(A pg. 59)  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
The DVD-RAM disc loaded has had its protect tab slid to the  
protect position.  
a Timer Programming cannot be made.  
N Release the protect tab. (A pg. 8)  
Date and time set on the unit is not correct.  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
The channel position does not correspond to that in the  
receiving area.  
N Set the correct channel position for the receiving broadcast.  
(A pg. 83)  
The a system does not timer-record properly.  
The unit’s channel positions have been set incorrectly.  
N Refer to Ac System SetupB (A pg. 83) and reperform the  
procedure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN  
92  
Other Problems  
Automatic Satellite Programme Recording does not start.  
The satellite receiver is not connected properly to this unit.  
N Connect the satellite receiver to the [L-2 IN/DECODER]  
connector properly. (A pg. 53)  
The image of the TV broadcast appears distorted on the TV  
screen.  
For basic connection  
N Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN for 3 or more seconds so that the  
Video output indicator (q) lights off on the front display panel.  
On the front display panel, A– –:– –B appears.  
Power failure occurred.  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
For component video connection  
N Press PROGRESSIVE SCAN for 3 or more seconds so that the  
Video output indicator (q) lights up on the front display panel.  
APROGRAMME FULLB appears on the TV screen during timer  
programming.  
32 programmes have already been timer programmed.  
Whistling or howling is heard from the TV during camcorder  
recording.  
N Clear unnecessary programmes on the unit, then try timer  
programming again. (A pg. 52)  
The camcorder’s microphone is too close to the TV.  
N Position the camcorder so its microphone is away from the TV.  
The TV’s volume is too high.  
The disc space does not increase when recorded titles are  
cleared.  
N Turn the TV’s volume down.  
The PC’s data recorded on a DVD-RAM drive cannot be  
cleared on this unit.  
When scanning channels, some of them are skipped over.  
N Format the disc. (When the disc is soiled, wipe the disc with a  
Those channels have been designated to be skipped.  
soft dry cloth before formatting.) (A pg. 9, 87)  
N If you need the skipped channels, restore them. (A pg. 84)  
Timer Recording (VHS Deck)  
The channel cannot be changed.  
Timer programming cannot be made.  
Recording or RetroActive recording* is in progress.  
N Press W to pause recording, change the channel, then press I  
Date and time is not correct.  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
The timer is not engaged.  
to resume recording.  
* HDD deck only  
N Press VHSj and confirm that the VHS timer indicator lights up  
Channel settings that were made manually seem to have  
changed or disappeared.  
on the front display panel.  
Timer recording is in progress.  
After the manual settings were made, Auto Channel Set was  
performed.  
N Timer programming can’t be performed while a timer recording  
is in progress. Wait until it finishes.  
N Perform AClock SetB (A pg. 86).  
Timer programming recording does not start.  
Malfunction occurs and the unit cannot be power off.  
Date and time is not correct.  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
The timer is not engaged.  
N Reset the unit by disconnecting the AC power plug from the AC  
outlet and connect again.  
N Press VHSj and confirm that the VHS timer indicator lights up  
on the front display panel.  
The VHS recording lamp on the unit won’t stop blinking.  
The timer is engaged but there’s no cassette loaded.  
N Load a cassette with the record safety tab intact.  
N Remove the cassette and cover the hole with adhesive tape, or  
insert a cassette with the record safety tab intact.  
a Timer Programming cannot be made.  
Date and time set on the unit is not correct.  
N Set date and time correctly. (A pg. 86)  
The channel position does not correspond to that in the  
receiving area.  
N Set the correct channel position for the receiving broadcast.  
(A pg. 83)  
The a system does not timer-record properly.  
The unit’s channel positions have been set incorrectly.  
N Refer to Ac System SetupB (A pg. 83) and re-perform the  
procedure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
EN  
93  
CAN NOT FINALISE THIS DISC  
Finalising is not complete since the disc may be dirty or  
damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. (A pg. 9, 88)  
DISC NOT REGISTERED IN THE LIBRARY  
REGISTER DISC?  
CAN NOT CANCEL FINALISATION OF THIS DISC  
A disc that is not registered in the library has been inserted.  
Register the disc as necessary. (A pg. 62)  
Cancelling disc finalisation is not complete since the disc may be  
dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. (A pg. 9,  
88)  
INSERT DISC XXXX  
Appears when a title that has been selected in the library is not  
contained in the loaded disc.  
PRESS [STOP] AGAIN TO STOP RECORDING  
During Live Memory playback, o has been pressed. (A pg. 46)  
CAN NOT RECORD OR MAKE PLAY LIST  
DELETE UNWANTED TITLES  
TIMER RECORDING COMPLETED  
Recording and/or editing cannot be performed.  
The number of titles exceeds 99.  
The number of play lists exceeds 999.  
Timer recording has finished during Live Memory playback.  
PLAYBACK WILL STOP  
THEN TIMER RECORDING WILL START  
SET CLOCK BEFORE TIMER PROGRAMMING  
Timer recording finished during Live Memory playback, then the  
To set the timer programme, the clock must be set in advance.  
(A pg. 86)  
next timer recording is about to begin while playback continues.  
COPY PROHIBITED  
CAN NOT RECORD  
PROGRAMME FULL  
DELETE UNWANTED TIMER PROGRAMMES  
An attempt has been made to record copy-protected contents.  
An attempt has been made to record copy-once contents on a  
disc that is not CPRM compatible, such as DVD-R.  
You can programme this unit to timer-record as many as 32  
programmes. To programme more, you need to cancel a timer  
programme already set. (A pg. 52)  
COPY PROHIBITED  
CAN NOT PLAY  
DISC NOT LOADED  
Operation has been attempted when a disc is not loaded, or  
loaded upside down. (A pg. 8)  
The unit has detected invalid contents at the start or in the middle  
of playback.  
DISC NOT RECORDABLE  
INSERT RECORDABLE DISC  
THE i.LINK DEVICE THAT YOU HAVE CONNECTED IS NOT  
RECOGNIZED  
MAKE SURE THAT THE DEVICE IS CONNECTED PROPERLY  
AND POWERED ON  
When a playback-only disc or a finalised disc is loaded, R has  
been pressed. (A pg. 5)  
An attempt has been made to start DV dubbing when a digital  
video camera is not properly connected to the unit.  
Check the connection. (A pg. 68)  
SHOWVIEW NO. ERROR  
CONFIRM SHOWVIEW NO. THEN RETRY  
An invalid a number has been input. (A pg. 49)  
GUIDE PROGRAM IS NOT SET  
SET GUIDE PROGRAM THEN RETRY  
To set the timer programme using the a system, the  
Guide Programme Number must be set in advance. (A pg. 83)  
CAN NOT SET SHOWVIEW TIMER PROGRAMMING DURING  
TIMER RECORDING OR INSTANT TIMER RECORDING  
Appears when you tried to input a a number during timer  
recording or instant timer recording.  
REGION CODE ERROR  
CHECK DISC  
A disc loaded cannot be played back on this unit since the region  
number of the disc does not match that of the unit. (A pg. 6)  
UNREADABLE DISC  
CHECK DISC  
When an incompatible disc is loaded, I has been pressed.  
(A pg. 6)  
COULD NOT FORMAT THE DISC  
CHECK THE DISC  
Formatting is not complete since the disc may be dirty or  
damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. (A pg. 9, 87)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
EN  
94  
GENERAL  
VIDEO/AUDIO (VHS Deck)  
Power requirement  
Signal system  
AC 220 V - 240 VH, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
PAL colour signal and CCIR monochrome signal, 625 lines/50  
fields  
Power consumption  
Power on: 47 W  
Power off: 16.6 W  
Recording system  
DA4 (Double Azimuth) head helical scan system  
Temperature  
Operating: 5°C to 35°C  
Storage: –20°C to 60°C  
Format  
VHS PAL standard  
Maximum recording time  
(SP): 240 min. with E-240 video cassette  
(LP): 480 min. with E-240 video cassette  
Operating position  
Horizontal only  
Dimensions (WxHxD)  
435 mm x 96 mm x 383 mm  
Signal-to-noise ratio  
45 dB  
Weight  
7.2 kg  
Horizontal resolution  
230 lines  
Input/Output  
Video input: 0.5 – 2.0 Vp-p, 75 K (pin jack)  
Audio input:  
Frequency range  
(Normal audio): 70 Hz to 10,000 Hz  
(Hi-Fi audio): 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz  
–8 dB, 50 kK (pin jack)  
Corresponding to mono (left)  
Audio output: –8 dB, 1 kK (pin jack)  
21-pin SCART connectors:  
IN/OUT x 1, IN/DECODER x 1  
Specifications shown are for SP mode unless otherwise specified.  
TUNER/TIMER  
Input/Output (HDD & DVD Deck Only)  
S-video input:  
Y: 0.8 – 1.2 Vp-p, 75 K  
C: 0.2 – 0.4 Vp-p, 75 K  
i.Link: 4-pin for DV input  
Component video output:  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
CB/CR, PB/PR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 K  
Corresponding to copy protection  
SAT Control: R3.5 mm  
Tuning system  
Frequency synthesised tuner  
Channel coverage  
VHF: 47 MHz – 89 MHz/  
104 MHz – 300 MHz/  
302 MHz – 470 MHz  
UHF: 470 MHz – 862 MHz  
Memory backup time  
Approx. 60 minutes  
Digital audio output:  
ACCESSORIES  
Optical: –18 dBm, 660 nm  
Coaxial: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 K  
Corresponding to Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround  
Bit stream  
Provided accessories  
RF cable,  
21-pin SCART cable,  
Satellite Controller,  
Infrared remote control unit,  
AR6B battery x 2  
Selectable in digital audio output setting menu  
VIDEO/AUDIO (DVD Deck)  
Recording time  
Maximum 8 hours (with 4.7 GB disc)  
(XP): Approx. 1 hour  
E.& O.E. Design and specifications subject to change without  
notice.  
(SP): Approx. 2 hours  
(LP): Approx. 4 hours  
(EP): Approx. 6 hours  
ATTENTION:  
This unit contains microcomputers. External electronic noise or  
interference could cause malfunctioning. In such cases, switch  
the unit off and unplug the mains power cord. Then plug it in  
again and turn the unit on. Take out the disc. After checking the  
disc, operate the unit as usual.  
(FR): Approx. 1 hour – 8 hours  
Audio recording system  
Dolby Digital (2 ch)  
Linear PCM (XP mode only)  
Video recording compression system  
MPEG2 (CBR/VBR)  
VIDEO/AUDIO (HDD Deck)  
Video recording compression system  
MPEG2 (VBR)  
Audio recording system  
Dolby Digital (2 ch)  
Linear PCM (XP mode only)  
Recording time  
Maximum 300 hours (with 160 GB HDD)  
(XP): Approx. 34 hours  
(SP): Approx. 69 hours  
(LP): Approx. 138 hours  
(EP): Approx. 209 hours  
(FR): Approx. 36 – 300 hours  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
APPENDIX  
EN  
95  
Language Code List  
AA  
AB  
AF  
AM  
AR  
AS  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BE  
BG  
BH  
BI  
Afar  
IK  
Inupiak  
RN  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Kirundi  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Ameharic  
Arabic  
IN  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Hebrew  
Rumanian  
Russian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
IS  
IW  
JI  
Yiddish  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
JW  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
LT  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Sangho  
Serbo-Croatian  
Singhalese  
Slovak  
Greenlandic  
Cambodian  
Kannada  
Korean (KOR)  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Byelorussian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
SK  
SL  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
Bislama  
Bengali, Bangla  
Tibetan  
BN  
BO  
BR  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Siswati  
Sesotho  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Tamil  
Kirghiz  
Breton  
Latin  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Lingala  
Laothian  
Lithuanian  
Latvian, Lettish  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Welsh  
LV  
Bhutani  
Greek  
MG  
MI  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
Telugu  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Tajik  
Thai  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Setswana  
Tonga  
TK  
TL  
FJ  
Fiji  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
Faroese  
Frisian  
Malay (MAY)  
Maltese  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
Irish  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
Scots Gaelic  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Nepali  
Occitan  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
Twi  
(Afan) Oromo  
Oriya  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Hindi  
Panjabi  
Uzbek  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
PL  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
Polish  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Pashto, Pushto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Rhaeto-Romance  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZU  
Xhosa  
IE  
Yoruba  
Zulu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
APPENDIX  
EN  
96  
Country/Area Code List for Parental Lock  
AD  
AE  
AF  
AG  
AI  
Andorra  
CK  
Cook Islands  
Chile  
GN  
GP  
GQ  
GR  
GS  
Guinea  
United Arab Emirates  
Afghanistan  
CL  
Guadeloupe  
Equatorial Guinea  
Greece  
CM  
CN  
CO  
Cameroon  
China  
Antigua and Barbuda  
Anguilla  
Colombia  
South Georgia and the South  
Sandwich Islands  
AL  
Albania  
CR  
CU  
CV  
CX  
CY  
CZ  
Costa Rica  
Cuba  
GT  
GU  
GW  
GY  
HK  
HM  
Guatemala  
Guam  
AM  
AN  
AO  
AQ  
AR  
Armenia  
Netherlands Antilles  
Angola  
Cape Verde  
Christmas Island  
Cyprus  
Guinea-Bissau  
Guyana  
Antarctica  
Argentina  
Hong Kong  
Czech Republic  
Heard Island and McDonald  
Islands  
AS  
AT  
American Samoa  
Austria  
DE  
DJ  
DK  
DM  
DO  
DZ  
EC  
EE  
EG  
EH  
ER  
ES  
ET  
FI  
Germany  
Djibouti  
HN  
HR  
HT  
HU  
ID  
Honduras  
Croatia  
AU  
AW  
AZ  
BA  
BB  
BD  
BE  
BF  
BG  
BH  
BI  
Australia  
Denmark  
Dominica  
Dominican Republic  
Algeria  
Haiti  
Aruba  
Hungary  
Azerbaijan  
Bosnia and Herzegovina  
Barbados  
Indonesia  
IE  
Ireland  
Ecuador  
IL  
Israel  
Bangladesh  
Belgium  
Estonia  
IN  
India  
Egypt  
IO  
IQ  
IR  
British Indian Ocean Territory  
Burkina Faso  
Bulgaria  
Western Sahara  
Eritrea  
Iraq  
Iran (Islamic Republic of)  
Bahrain  
Spain  
IS  
Iceland  
Italy  
Burundi  
Ethiopia  
IT  
BJ  
Benin  
Finland  
JM  
JO  
JP  
KE  
Jamaica  
Jordan  
Japan  
Kenya  
BM  
BN  
BO  
Bermuda  
FJ  
Fiji  
Brunei Darussalam  
Bolivia  
FK  
FM  
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)  
Micronesia  
(Federated States of)  
BR  
BS  
BT  
BV  
BW  
BY  
Brazil  
FO  
FR  
FX  
GA  
GB  
GD  
Faroe Islands  
France  
KG  
KH  
KI  
Kyrgyzstan  
Cambodia  
Bahamas  
Bhutan  
France, Metropolitan  
Gabon  
Kiribati  
Bouvet Island  
Botswana  
Belarus  
KM  
KN  
KP  
Comoros  
United Kingdom  
Grenada  
Saint Kitts and Nevis  
Korea, Democratic People’s  
Republic of  
BZ  
CA  
CC  
CF  
CG  
Belize  
GE  
GF  
GH  
GI  
Georgia  
KR  
KW  
KY  
KZ  
LA  
Korea, Republic of  
Kuwait  
Canada  
French Guiana  
Ghana  
Cocos (Keeling) Islands  
Central African Republic  
Congo  
Cayman Islands  
Kazakhstan  
Gibraltar  
GL  
Greenland  
Lao People’s Democratic  
Republic  
CH  
CI  
Switzerland  
Côte d’Ivoire  
GM  
Gambia  
LB  
Lebanon  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
APPENDIX  
EN  
97  
LC  
LI  
Saint Lucia  
Liechtenstein  
Sri Lanka  
NU  
NZ  
OM  
PA  
Niue  
SZ  
TC  
TD  
TF  
TG  
TH  
TJ  
Swaziland  
New Zealand  
Oman  
Turks and Caicos Islands  
Chad  
LK  
LR  
LS  
Liberia  
Panama  
French Southern Territories  
Togo  
Lesotho  
PE  
PF  
PG  
PH  
PK  
PL  
Peru  
LT  
Lithuania  
French Polynesia  
Papua New Guinea  
Philippines  
Pakistan  
Thailand  
LU  
LV  
Luxembourg  
Latvia  
Tajikistan  
TK  
TM  
TN  
TO  
TP  
TR  
TT  
TV  
TW  
TZ  
UA  
UG  
UM  
Tokelau  
LY  
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya  
Morocco  
Turkmenistan  
Tunisia  
MA  
MC  
MD  
MG  
MH  
ML  
MM  
MN  
MO  
MP  
MQ  
Poland  
Monaco  
PM  
PN  
PR  
PT  
PW  
PY  
QA  
RE  
RO  
RU  
Saint Pierre and Miquelon  
Pitcairn  
Tonga  
Moldova, Republic of  
Madagascar  
Marshall Islands  
Mali  
East Timor  
Turkey  
Puerto Rico  
Portugal  
Trinidad and Tobago  
Tuvalu  
Palau  
Myanmar  
Paraguay  
Taiwan  
Mongolia  
Qatar  
Tanzania, United Republic of  
Ukraine  
Macau  
Réunion  
Northern Mariana Islands  
Martinique  
Romania  
Uganda  
Russian Federation  
United States Minor Outlying  
Islands  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MU  
MV  
Mauritania  
Montserrat  
Malta  
RW  
SA  
SB  
SC  
SD  
Rwanda  
US  
UY  
UZ  
VA  
VC  
United States  
Saudi Arabia  
Solomon Islands  
Seychelles  
Sudan  
Uruguay  
Uzbekistan  
Mauritius  
Maldives  
Vatican City State (Holy See)  
Saint Vincent and the  
Grenadines  
MW  
MX  
MY  
MZ  
NA  
NC  
NE  
NF  
NG  
NI  
Malawi  
SE  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Sweden  
VE  
VG  
VI  
Venezuela  
Mexico  
Singapore  
Virgin Islands (British)  
Virgin Islands (U.S.)  
Viet Nam  
Malaysia  
Mozambique  
Namibia  
Saint Helena  
Slovenia  
VN  
VU  
WF  
WS  
YE  
YT  
YU  
ZA  
ZM  
ZR  
ZW  
SJ  
Svalbard and Jan Mayen  
Slovakia  
Vanuatu  
New Caledonia  
Niger  
SK  
SL  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SR  
ST  
SV  
SY  
Wallis and Futuna Islands  
Samoa  
Sierra Leone  
San Marino  
Norfolk Island  
Nigeria  
Yemen  
Senegal  
Mayotte  
Nicaragua  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Somalia  
Yugoslavia  
South Africa  
Zambia  
NL  
Suriname  
NO  
NP  
NR  
Sao Tome and Principe  
El Salvador  
Nepal  
Zaire  
Nauru  
Syrian Arab Republic  
Zimbabwe  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX  
EN  
98  
TV Station And ID List  
The AIDB abbreviation is what is shown on-screen in lieu of the station name. The AIDB abbreviation is listed in the Confirmation screen and  
is displayed on the TV screen when the unit is tuned to a different station.  
ID  
1000  
3SAT  
9LIV  
STATION NAME  
ID  
STATION NAME  
ID  
SHOW  
SIC  
SKY  
STATION NAME  
TV1000  
3SAT  
9LIVE  
AB3  
JIM TV  
JSTV  
KA2  
JIM  
JSTV  
KA2  
KAB1  
KAN2  
KAN5  
KBH  
KIKA  
LA7  
SHOW  
SOCIEDADE  
SKY CHANNEL  
SKY NEWS  
SPEKTRUM  
SPORT  
SUPER RTL  
STAR-TV  
SVT1  
SVT2  
NEWS  
SUEDWEST3  
TCC  
TCM  
TELE  
TELE5  
TF1  
TV DE MADRID  
TELEMONTECARLO  
TMF  
TNT INT  
TRT INT  
TSI  
TSI2  
TSR  
TSR2  
BRTN TV1  
TV2  
TV2 ZULU  
TV3  
TV3 PLUS  
TV4  
TV5  
TV6  
TV8  
TVE1  
TVE2  
TV GALICIA  
TV INDEPENDENT  
TV NORGE  
TVN24  
TVP1  
TVP2  
TV POLONIA  
V8  
VIDEO  
VH-1  
VITAYA  
VIVA  
VIVA2  
VIDEO MUSIC  
VOX  
VIASAT3  
VT4  
VTM  
West3  
WORLD  
YLE1  
YLE2  
YORIN  
ZDF  
AB3  
KABEL1  
KANAL2  
KANAL5  
KBH.KANAL  
KINDER.KANAL  
LA7  
LIBERTY TV  
LOCAL  
M6  
MBR  
MCM  
MDR  
MOVIE  
MTV  
MTV1  
MTV2  
MTV3  
NATIONAL.G  
NEWS24  
NORD3  
N-TV  
NBC SUPER  
NDR  
SKYN  
SPEK  
SPRT  
SRTL  
STAR  
SVT1  
SVT2  
SV24  
SWR  
TCC  
TCM  
TELE  
TELE5  
TF1  
ADLT  
ANIM  
ANT3  
ARD  
ARTE  
ATV  
ADULT  
ANIMAL PLANET  
ANTENA3  
ARD  
ARTE  
MAGYAR ATV  
BERLIN 1  
BBC GROUP  
BBC1  
LIB  
LOCA  
M6  
B1  
BBC  
BBC1  
BBC2  
BBCW  
BIO+  
BLOO  
BR3  
C+  
C1  
C9  
MBC  
MCM  
MDR  
MOVE  
MTV  
MTV1  
MTV2  
MTV3  
NGEO  
N24  
BBC2  
BBC WORLD  
TV BIO+  
BLOOMBERG  
BAYERN3  
CANAL PLUS  
PORTUGUSES  
VALENCIA  
CANALE5  
KETNET CANVAS  
KANAAL Z  
CHANNEL4  
CHANNEL5  
CHILD  
CINEMA  
TELECLUB  
CMT  
CNN  
ANDALUCIA  
CT 1  
TM  
TMC  
TMF  
TNT  
CAN5  
CANV  
CANZ  
CH4  
TRT  
N3  
N-TV  
NBC  
TSI1  
TSI2  
TSR1  
TSR2  
TV1  
TV2  
TV2Z  
TV3  
TV3+  
TV4  
TV5  
TV6  
TV8  
CH5  
NDR  
CHLD  
CINE  
CLUB  
CMT  
CNN  
CSUR  
CT1  
CT2  
DISC  
DK1  
NED1  
NED2  
NED3  
NETWORK5  
NED1  
NED2  
NED3  
NET5  
NEWS  
NICK  
NOVA  
NRK1  
NRK2  
ODE  
ORF1  
ORF2  
PHOE  
POLS  
PREM  
PRIM  
PRO7  
RAI1  
RAI2  
RAI3  
RET4  
RTB1  
RTB2  
RTL  
RTL2  
RTL4  
RTL5  
RTL7  
RTLK  
RTP  
RTV4  
SAT1  
SBS6  
SERV  
SF1  
NICKELODEON  
NOVA  
NRK  
NRK2  
ODEON  
ORF1  
CT 2  
DISCOVERY  
DENMARK1  
DENMARK2  
DENMARK4  
DR TV  
DR2  
DSF  
DUNA TV  
ETB1  
ETB2  
TVE1  
TVE2  
TVG  
TVI  
DK2  
DK4  
DR1  
DR2  
ORF2  
PHOENIX  
POL SAT  
PREMIERE  
PRIMA TV  
PRO7  
RAI1  
RAI2  
RAI3  
RETE4  
TELE21  
RTBF1 / 2  
RTL  
RTL2  
RTL4  
RTL5  
RTL7  
RTLK  
RTP  
TVN  
DSF  
TV24  
TVP1  
TVP2  
TV P  
V8  
VCR  
VH-1  
VIT  
VIVA  
VIV2  
VMTV  
VOX  
VSAT  
VT4  
VTM  
WDR3  
WRLD  
YLE1  
YLE2  
YORN  
ZDF  
DUNA  
ETB1  
ETB2  
ETV  
EUNW  
EURO  
EUSP  
FEMM  
FILM  
FNET  
FR2  
ETV  
EURO NEWS  
EURONEWS  
EUROSPORTS  
FEMMAN  
FILM  
FILMNET  
France2  
France3  
France5  
GALAVISION  
HBO  
HESSEN3  
H.S.EURO  
INFO-KANAL  
ITALIA1  
FR3  
FR5  
GALA  
HBO  
HR3  
HSEU  
INFO  
ITA1  
ITA7  
ITV1  
RTV4  
SAT1  
SBS  
Service  
SF1  
ITALIA7  
ITV  
SF2  
SF2  
ZTV  
ZTV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LIST OF TERMS  
EN  
99  
A
P
A-B Repeat Playback ................................................ 30  
Accidental erasure prevention .................................... 45  
Adjusting The Picture Quality ..................................... 31  
Angle Selection ........................................................ 27  
Audio Channel Selection ........................................... 28  
Audio Language/Sound Selection ............................... 28  
Auto Channel Set ..................................................... 83  
Pan&Scan ................................................................ 21  
Play List ................................................................... 60  
Playback Control (PBC) ............................................. 28  
Programme Playback ................................................ 32  
Progressive scan ...................................................... 89  
Random Playback ..................................................... 32  
Receiving Stereo And Bilingual Programmes ....36, 38, 45  
Recordable/Playable Discs .......................................... 5  
Recording Medium And Format .................................... 7  
Recording Mode ................................................. 34, 37  
Region Number .......................................................... 6  
Register Disc ............................................................ 62  
Relief Recording ....................................................... 51  
Repeat Playback ................................................ 29, 43  
Resume Function ..................................................... 26  
Resuming Playback .................................................. 48  
RetroActive Recording .............................................. 48  
B
B.E.S.T. Picture System ............................................ 45  
C
Cancel And Change Programmes .........................52, 56  
Check Programmes .............................................52, 56  
Country/Area Code List for Parental Lock .................... 96  
D
Disc menu ............................................................... 25  
Disc Remaining Time ...........................................35, 38  
Disc Resume ........................................................... 79  
Discs For Playback Only ............................................. 6  
DVD menu ............................................................... 25  
S
Select The Switching Interval Of The Slide Show ......... 32  
Selection Of The Audio Channel To Be Recorded  
On A Disc ........................................................... 36  
Setting The Progressive Mode ................................... 32  
Simulated Surround Effect ......................................... 31  
Simultaneous Recording and Playback ....................... 48  
Skip Search ..................................................26, 39, 42  
Slow Motion ..................................................26, 39, 42  
Soundtrack Selection ................................................ 43  
Still Picture/Frame-By-Frame Playback ............26, 39, 42  
Subtitle Selection ...................................................... 28  
E
Elapsed Recording Time Indication ................. 35, 38, 44  
F
File Structure Of Discs ................................................ 7  
Free Rate Function ................................................... 36  
G
Guide Programme Number ........................................ 83  
I
Index Search ............................................................ 42  
Instant Timer Recording (ITR) ......................... 35, 38, 45  
Interlaced scan ......................................................... 89  
T
Tape Position Indicator .............................................. 15  
Tape Remaining Time ............................................... 45  
Temporary Recording ................................................ 48  
Time Search ............................................................ 31  
Top menu ................................................................ 25  
TV Station And ID List ............................................... 98  
J
Jump Search .......................................................26, 40  
Just Clock ................................................................ 86  
L
U
Language Code List .................................................. 95  
Letter Box ................................................................ 21  
Live Memory ............................................................ 46  
Unplayable Discs ........................................................ 6  
Usable cassettes ...................................................... 41  
V
M
Variable Speed Search ...................................25, 39, 42  
VHS Progressive Scan .............................................. 43  
VPS/PDC Recording ........................................... 50, 55  
Manual Channel Set ................................................. 84  
Manual Tracking ....................................................... 43  
Marking Positions To Play Back Again Later ................ 27  
Menu/Audio/Subtitle Language Set ............................. 20  
Weekly/Daily Recording ............................................ 50  
When Programmes Overlap Each Other ..................... 56  
N
Next Function Memory .............................................. 43  
O
One Touch Replay ................................... 28, 40, 42, 48  
On-screen Bar .......................................................... 29  
On-screen Language Set .......................................... 20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
EN  
Printed in Germany  
1204MNH-SW-VE  
EU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2004 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  

Indesit Washer IWSC 51051 User Manual
Intel Security Camera 05 2065 002 User Manual
Invacare Mobility Aid Electric wheelchair User Manual
iRobot Vacuum Cleaner Cleaning System User Manual
Ironman Fitness Treadmill IRONMAN 120e User Manual
John Deere Electric Heater AC 100LP User Manual
Johnson Controls Air Conditioner PC090 THRU 240 User Manual
JVC DVD Player XV N310B User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television PD 50X795 User Manual
Kenwood Stereo Receiver KDC BT755HD User Manual